Home

BMW 535xi Owner's Manual

1. Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly Your BMW is covered by the following warran ties gt New Vehicle Limited Warranty Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty Federal Emissions Performance Warranty VV VV California Emission Control System Limited Warranty Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Reporting safety defects For US customers The following applies only to vehicles owned and operated in the US If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying BMW of North America LLC P O Box 1227 Westwood New Jersey 07675 1227 Telephone 1 800 831 1117 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or BMW of North America LLC To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http A
2. To repeat pairing 1 Select Restart pairing and press the con troller Help Pairing was not successful Please start the pairing procedure again lf the problem reoccurs your telephone may not be compatible 2 Repeat steps 9 to 14 If pairing was repeatedly unsuccessful contact BMW Customer Relations To call BMW Customer Relations Select Help and press the controller Restart pairing Pairing was not successful Please start the pairing procedure again If the problem reoccurs your telephone may not be compatible The phone number of BMW Customer Rela tions and information required for pairing is shown on the display With mobile phones already paired you can select the phone num ber of BMW Customer Relations to establish the connection FF Bluetooth Help m c E E e O For questions about your vehicle s Bluetooth system please contact Vehicle ID Phone preparation EE12345 1234567 197 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Telephoning List of paired mobile phones The mobile phones for which the vehicle has stored the pairing data can be displayed If sev eral paired mobile phones are detected by the vehicle simultaneously you can operate the mobile phone highest up in the list via the vehi cle You can change the order of the mobile phones in the list As long as a mobile phone is selected in this list
3. entering via voice 147 entry 144 selecting from address book 152 selecting using information 149 storing 151 Destination guidance 156 bypassing route sections 160 canceling voice instructions 55 changing specified route 154 displaying route 157 distance and arrival 156 interrupting 156 starting 156 terminating continuing 156 voice instructions 159 volume of voice instructions 160 Destination list for navigation 150 Destinations recently driven to 150 Details in audio mode 183 189 in radio mode 179 Detour in navigation 163 Dial in mobile phone mode 201 Dial number 201 Diamond button 55 Diamond button 54 Digital clock 78 Digital radio refer to High Definition Radio 176 Dimensions 261 Directional indicators refer to Turn signals 67 Direction announcements refer to Voice instructions 159 Direction instructions refer to Voice instructions 159 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Directory refer to Phone book 202 Directory for navigation refer to Address book 151 Displacement refer to Engine data 260 Display 88 Display refer to iDrive controls 16 Display elements refer to Instrument cluster 12 Displaying vehicle data 216 Display lighting refer to Instrument lighting 111 Display off 21 Displays on Control Display refer to iDrive 16 refer to Instr
4. p 3 fa ad S pur Lu The display of the stations with the best recep tion is updated The frequencies of the stations Allstations Presets are displayed i FMI 955 Turn the controller to set a certain fre quency Change into the second field from the top Turn the controller until the desired selec tion criterion is selected and press the con Select FM or AM and press the control ler Radio Professional on AM and Radio Busi troller ness Select the desired frequency or station If you are on a longer journey and leave the Set is selected transmission range of the stations originally set you can update the list of stations with the best i reception 4 Manual Select FM or AM and press the control ler LA Change into the second field from the top EAN 94 96 Select Autostore and press the controller STE Set is selected 9 D 5 EM Press the controller Preset Manual Other menu items are displayed Select Store and press the controller r EM 4 Manual SORDS Press the controller Other menu items are displayed Tone ey 96 Scan Y Select Autostore and press the controller 9 5 5 N iT FMI Presets is displayed 4 Autostore Turn the controller until the desired mem ory position is selected 174 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 7 Press the controller The st
5. Alarm system The concept The vehicle alarm system responds gt When a door the hood or the luggage com partment lid tailgate or rear window are opened gt Tomovements in the vehicle interior motion sensor refer to page 38 gt To changes in the vehicle s tilt if someone attempts to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle gt To interruptions in battery voltage Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by the alarm system gt with an acoustic alarm gt by switching on the hazard warning flashers gt by flashing the high beams Arming and disarming alarm system When you lock or unlock the vehicle either with the remote control or at the door lock the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time The luggage compartment lid tailgate can also be opened with the system armed with the Ej button on the remote control refer to page 33 When the luggage compartment lid tailgate is closed it is locked and monitored again Switching off alarm gt Unlock the vehicle using the remote control refer to page 30 gt Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock Indicator lamp displays gt The indicator lamp under the interior rear view mirror flashes continuously the sys tem is armed gt The indicator lamp flashes after locking doors hood luggage compartment lid tail gate or rear window are not properly closed Even if you do not close the alerted area the system beg
6. Towing methods Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body and chassis parts otherwise damage may result 4 In some countries towing with tow bars or ropes in public traffic is not permitted Familiar ize yourself with the regulations on towing in the respective country With tow bar The towing vehicle may not be lighter than the vehicle to be towed otherwise it will not be possible to reliably control vehicle response 4 The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles Should it prove impossi ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle please observe the following gt Clearance and maneuvering capability will be sharply limited during cornering Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG gt When mounted at an angle the tow bar will exert lateral forces tending to push the vehicle sideways Only attach the tow bar to the tow fittings as attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to damage lt 4 With tow rope When starting off in the towing vehicle make sure that the tow rope is taut To avoid jerking and the associated EN stresses on vehicle components when towing always use nylon ropes or nylon straps Only attach tow ropes to the tow fittings as attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to damage With tow truck Have the BMW transported with a tow truck with a so called lift bar or on a flat bed With a tow truck xDrive Do not t
7. gt Audio sources volume and tone settings refer to page 169 gt Radio gt Display of stored stations refer to page 172 gt Switching RDS Radio Data System on off refer to page 175 gt Phone volume setting refer to pages 200 206 Central locking system The concept The central locking system functions when the driver s door is closed The system simultaneously engages and releases the locks on the following gt Doors gt Luggage compartment lid or tailgate and rear window gt Fuel filler door 29 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Opening and closing Operating from outside gt via the remote control gt via the door lock gt with comfort access via the door handles At the same time the anti theft system is also operated It prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or door han dles In addition it the remote control is used the welcome lamps the interior lamps and the courtesy lamps are switched on or off The alarm system is armed disarmed at the same time You can find more detailed information on the alarm system on page 37 Operating from inside Via the button for central locking refer to page 32 The fuel filler door is not locked Inthe event of a sufficiently severe accident the central locking system unlocks automatically In addition the hazard warning flashers and inte rior lamps come on Opening
8. nf 3 Entertainment The system says Entertainment tt Track 2 Entertainment we 4 CD The system says CD ont 5 Press the ES button on the steering wheel lt 6 Select track e g Track 1 lt The system says Track 144 24 online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Notes gt The mobile phone can also be operated with voice commands refer to page 205 4 For voice commands bear the following in mind v O S D i lt gt Say the commands and numbers smoothly and at normal volume avoiding excessive emphasis and pauses This also applies to spelling when entering the destination gt Always issue commands in the language of the voice command system gt When selecting a radio station use the common pronunciation of the station name gt For entries in the voice activated phone book only use names in the language of the voice command system and do not use abbreviations gt Keep the doors windows and glass sun roof or panorama glass sunroof closed to prevent interference from ambient noise gt Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking 25 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with information for complete control of your vehicle Its extensive array of fe
9. stowing cargo 138 vehicle 137 Load securing equipment refer to Securing cargo 138 Lock after driving 33 Lock buttons in the doors refer to Locking 33 Locking 31 confirmation signals 31 from inside 33 from outside 31 without key refer to Comfort access 38 Locking and unlocking doors confirmation signals 31 from inside 32 from outside 30 Low beams 107 automatic 107 replacing bulbs 245 Lower back support refer to Lumbar support 47 Lug bolts 250 tightening torque refer to After mounting 250 wrench 249 Luggage compartment refer to Cargo bay Luggage compartment lid 33 emergency operation refer to Manual operation 34 emergency release 34 locking separately 34 opening from inside 33 opening from outside 34 unlocking and locking from inside 32 unlocking manually 34 279 Oo cD fia Gen 9 ad Everything from A to Z Luggage compartment lid tailgate comfort access 39 Luggage net refer to Partition net 128 Luggage rack refer to Roof mounted luggage rack 139 Lumbar support 47 LW waveband 172 M M S tires refer to Winter tires 230 Maintenance 237 refer to Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models 237 refer to Service requirements 81 refer to Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models 237 Maintenance system 237 Malfunction warnings re
10. 6 Select Tailgate and press the controller 4 wi Door lOCKS gt Tailgate Opening angle 7 Turn the controller The adjustment is applied the field can be changed Opening tailgate The tailgate opens automatically when you gt Press the button on the outside of the tail gate when the vehicle is unlocked ie l F gt Press the EJ button on the remote control for approx 1 second gt During opening the tailgate pivots back and up Make sure that adequate clear ance is available before opening 4 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Automatic roll up cover When the tailgate or rear window are opened the roll up cover is raised and when the tailgate and rear window are closed it is lowered FN Make sure that the closing area of the roll up cover is clear of obstructions other wise the payload or the roll up cover may be damaged lt 4 Details on the roll up cover are provided on page 127 Closing tailgate FN Make sure that the closing path of the tail gate is clear otherwise injuries may result lt The tailgate closes automatically when the but ton on the inside of the tailgate is pressed To interrupt the opening or closing process gt Press the button on the inside of the tail gate gt Press the button on the outside of the tail gate gt Closing is not canceled when you put the vehicle into motion lt
11. Displaying traffic obstructions If a traffic obstruction is reported to the naviga tion system and Dynamic route is not selected you will be provided with certain infor mation from a distance of approx 25 miles 40 km e g the length of the traffic jam The last possible junction will be displayed shortly before this US 9 stopped traffic in 3 mis Length 2 0 mis delay 36min Select Detour and press the controller The navigation system determines a new route to avoid the traffic jam nc This information is also displayed if you have ms ll i i ik called up a different application on the Control Display W AQMIIPLP FALIFTO AILIanniIin eA Dynamic route pla ning When Dynamic route is selected the route will be changed automatically in the event of a traffic obstruction The system does not point out traffic obstructions along the original route Depending on road type as well as the nature and extent of the traffic obstruction the calcu lated route may also lead through the traffic obstruction O 2 2 gt Z Displaying current position You can have your current position displayed even when the destination guidance is switched off 1 Select Navigation and press the control ler 2 Change into the fourth field from the top Turn the controller until Current position is selected and press the controller w Navigation New destination e SANTA BARB
12. Only one compact wheel may be mounted Restore the wheels and tires to their original size as quickly as possible Failure to do so is a Safety risk 4 Vehicle battery Battery care The battery is 100 maintenance free i e the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli mate Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all matters concerning the battery Charging battery Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the terminals in the engine compartment with the engine switched off Connections refer to Jump starting on page 254 Disposal Have old batteries disposed of by your X BMW center or hand them in to a recy cling center Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage Always restrain the battery to prevent it from tipping over during transport 4 Power failure Following a temporary power failure e g due to a discharged battery the use of some equip ment will be restricted requiring its reinitializa tion In the same way individual settings are lost and must be updated again gt Seat mirror and steering wheel memory The positions must be stored again refer to page 48 gt Time and date Must be updated again refer to page 86 gt Radio Radio stations must be stored again refer to page 174 gt Navigation system You must wait until the system becomes functional again refer to page 142 gt Glass roof el
13. Q i 32 220 32 220 32 220 32 220 32 220 32 220 33 230 35 240 35 240 38 260 33 230 33 230 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG RENE is ot wn 35 240 42 290 38 260 45 310 38 260 45 310 39 270 46 320 38 260 42 290 35 240 42 290 528xi Tire size Compact wheel T 135 80 R17 102M All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi kilopascal with cold tires Cold ambient temperature 245 45 R17 95 W 245 45 R17 99 V M S XL 225 50 R 17 94 V M S 225 50 R 17 94 W 225 50 R 17 94 H M S 245 40 R 18 93 W 245 40 R 18 97 V M S XL Front 245 40 R 18 93 W Rear 275 35 R 18 95 W Pressure specifications in psi kPa 61 420 Traveling speeds Traveling speeds up to max of including those exceeding 100 mph 160 km h 100 mph 160 km h AIR E TO PR LEE to pe AIT amp os F k gt k gt 32 220 35 240 32 220 33 230 35 240 42 290 32 220 36 250 32 220 36 250 38 260 45 310 32 220 35 240 32 220 33 230 38 260 42 290 More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 263 225 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Wheels and tires 535xi Tire size Compact wheel T 135 80 R17 102M All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi kilopascal with cold tires Cold ambient temperature 245 45R1795W 245 45 R17 99 V M S XL 225 50 R 17 94 W M S 225 50 R 17 94 W
14. SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY STREET Switching voice instructions on off Manually displaying traffic information Selecting route criteria Starting ending destination guidance Arrow to destination from a bird s eye view Distance to the next change of direction Current position ON OOF NN Direction of travel gt Outline arrow Destination guidance on the calculated route c e _ gt Z gt Solid arrow Arrow shows the route to be calculated from a bird s eye view when the vehicle is not located in an area contained on the navigation DVD e g in a parking struc ture Depending on the equipment the estimated time of arrival and the distance to the destina tion are displayed in the top or bottom line of the Control Display Before achange in direction the representation of the arrow changes 157 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG ion guidance Destinat SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY STREET 1 Street name for change of direction 2 Distance up to change of direction 3 Change of direction To exit the menu 4 Select the arrow and press the controller Displaying map view You can have your current position displayed on a map After starting the destination guidance the planned route is shown on the map 1 Select Navigation and press the control ler 2 Change into the fourth field from the top Turn the controller until the desired map view is
15. Symbols on vehicle components Ti Indicates that you should consult the rel evant section of this Owner s Manual for information on a particular part or assembly Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG The individual vehicle When purchasing your BMW you have decided in favor of a model with individualized equip ment and features This Owner s Manual describes the entire array of options and equip ment available with a specific BMW model Please bear in mind that the manual may con tain information on accessories and equipment that you have not specified for your own vehicle Sections describing options and special equip ment are marked by asterisks to assist you in identifying possible differences between the descriptions in this manual and your own vehi cle s equipment If equipment in your BMW is not described in this Owner s Manual please refer to the accom panying Supplementary Owner s Manuals Editorial notice BMW pursues a policy of continuous ongoing development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards combined with advanced state of the art technology For this reason itis possible that the features described in this Owner s Manual could differ from those on your vehicle For your own safety Maintenance and repairs A Advanced technology e g the use of modern materials and high performance electronics r
16. Telephoning The concept Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone preparation package After pairing a suitable mobile phone in the vehicle once you can oper ate the mobile phone via iDrive with the buttons on the steering wheel and by voice A mobile phone that has been paired once is automatically detected again with the engine running or the ignition switched on as soon as it is in the vehicle interior The logon data of up to four mobile phones can be stored simulta neously If several mobile phones are detected simultaneously the respective last mobile phone paired can be operated via the vehicle Using a phone in your vehicle Using snap in adapter The so called snap in adapter a mobile phone cradle enables the battery to be charged and the mobile phone to be connected to the exter nal antenna of your vehicle This ensures improved network reception and a consistent voice reproduction quality Ask your BMW cen ter which mobile phones snap in adapters are offered for For your safety A car phone makes life more convenient in many ways and can even Save lives in an emer gency While you should consult your mobile phone s separate operating instructions for a detailed description of safety precautions and information we request that you direct your particular attention to the following Only make entries when traffic conditions allow you to do so Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you a
17. Warning lamp does not light up from radio readiness gt Warning lamp lights up continuously Have the airbag system checked immedi ately in case of a malfunction otherwise there is a danger that the airbag system may not respond in the expected manner in an accident despite an impact of corresponding intensity lt Head Up Display The concept With the Head Up Display important informa tion is projected into the driver s field of view e g navigation instructions This enables you to take in this information without looking away from the road Palms HLV lsa ft SSi ss A so 4 v i O Switching on off Press the button h re BLVD d 1640 Tt pee as 3 2 nmaa 1 Navigation instructions Display gt Cruise control gt Active cruise control gt Leaving lane warning 3 Speed Selecting displays iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu Select Settings and press the controller 101 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Technology for comfort convenience and safety 4 Select Display settings and press the controller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Head Up Display is selected and press the controller 6 Change into the second field from the top Turn the controller until Head Up Display
18. 2 Press the controller to open the j menu Select Display off and press the control ler losources v d Audio ZT Display settings Steering wheel buttons YS Vehicle Tires Mm Language Units A759 Time Date To switch on press the controller Display off bh lt gt Programmable memory buttons You can save and request certain functions of iDrive on the programmable memory buttons Q S ae e G p lt gt Destinations of navigation gt Telephone phone numbers gt Entertainment gt radio station gt CD gt CD compartment of CD changer gt AUX gt USB audio interface The assignment of the programmable buttons is stored for the remote control currently in use Saving function Destinations of navigation 1 Select navigation destination e g in the destination list or the address book 2 Press the ER button longer than 2 seconds Special features gt With the destination guidance system and the map view started the current destina tion is stored gt During destination entry via a map the coordinates at the cursor are stored not the current destination Telephone phone numbers 1 Enter the phone number or select it in a list of the stored phone numbers e g of the A Z list 2 Press the WJ button longer than 2 seconds Ifa name is assigned to the phone number the name will also be stored 21 Online Edition for
19. 4 Select Service Info and press the control ler 81 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG a e ho mur e O Change to upper field if necessary Turn the ai a a controller until Service requirements is m No service is currently required selected and press the controller OK Check Con gt i gt A The deadline for service or a legally man dated inspection is approaching Please Status arrange a service appointment 10 2009 Rear brake pads i The service deadline has already passed A Vehicle Check 8 O Brake fluid k BE State inspection Ge Front brake pads Make sure the date on the Control Display is set Select Status and press the controller correctly refer to page 86 otherwise the effec a tiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not i can Service requirements 12 ensured Status Open the start menu FAR Press the controller to open the menu are a Frain FREE abs Select Info sources and press the control OK Brake fluid ler BK State inspection Select Service Info and press the control A00 mis A Vehicle check ler Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Service requirements is selected and press the controller The display shows a list of selected service and maintenance procedures as well as legally mandated inspections r 2 Select Status and press the controller
20. AUX In connection USB audio interface VV V Climate Vent settings Automatic programs Seat heater distribution VV VV Parked car operation menu Switching off Control Display Tone and display settings VF v Settings for your vehicle e g for the central locking system V Display of maintenance intervals and dead lines for legally mandated inspections gt Settings for telephone Operating principle From radio readiness refer to page 61 the fol lowing message is shown on the Control Dis play Warning Use this system only when traffic conditions permit Safe vehicle operation is the driver s responsibility For further details see owner s manual To hide the message Press the controller This displays the start menu The message is hidden after approx 10 sec onds Start menu Communication we Navigation W Entertainment You can call up all the functions of iDrive using five menu items Opening start menu Press the MENU button To open the start menu from the j menu Press the MENU button twice 17 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG v O S D i lt Driving tips AENA ELOLA Communications Entertainment o oO V i V W U x Opening menu items of start menu With the start menu you can open the menu items Communication Navigation Entertain ment and Climate by moving the control
21. Hands free system refer to Microphone 14 Hand washing 240 Hazard warning flashers 15 HDC 92 HDC Hill Descent Control 92 HDC on 92 HDC on off 55 HD radio 176 HD radio refer to High Definition Radio 176 Head airbags 99 Headlamp control automatic 107 Headlamp flasher 67 Headlamps 107 cleaning refer to Wiper system 68 cleaning tank refer to Capacities 264 filler neck for washer fluid 233 replacing bulbs 245 Head Light refer to Adaptive Head Light 109 277 Oo cD fia Gen 9 ad Everything from A to Z Head restraints 49 active front head restraints 49 removing 50 sitting safely 45 Head Up Display 102 Head Up Display 101 Heated mirrors 53 rear window 115 seats 51 steering wheel 54 Heating 113 exterior mirrors 53 interior 113 rear window 115 residual heat 116 seats 51 steering wheel 54 Heating with engine switched off refer to Residual heat 116 Heavy cargo refer to Securing cargo 138 Height refer to Dimensions 261 Height adjustment seats 46 steering wheel 54 High beam assistant 111 High beam assistant 109 High beams 109 headlamp flasher 109 indicator lamp 13 replacing bulbs 245 High Definition Radio 176 High pressure cleaning jets 239 240 High water refer to Driving through water 136 Hill Descent Control HDC 92 Hills 136 Holder
22. Ventsettings Driver Driver s side 1 Air directed toward the windshield and side windows 2 Air for the upper body 3 Airto footwell Front passenger side 4 Air for the upper body 5 Air to footwell gt Pressing the AUTO button cancels the manual air distribution settings 4 The automatic mode for the air volume remains effective with manual air distribution Switching cooling function on and off The cooling function cools and En dehumidifies the incoming air before also reheating it as required according to the temperature setting This function is only available when the engine IS running The cooling function helps to avoid condensa tion on the window surfaces or to quickly remove them Depending on the weather the windshield may fog over briefly when the engine is started The cooling function is also switched on with the AUTO program Maximum cooling E Maximally cooled air is obtained as quickly as possible at an outside temperature above approx 32 F 0 C and with the engine running 116 At the lowest temperature the automatic cli mate control switches into recirculating air mode The maximum air volume flows out of the vents for the upper body Therefore open these vents for maximum cooling AUC Automatic recirculated air control recirculated air mode You can respond to pollutants or unpleasant odors in the immediate environment by suspending the
23. You can store approx 100 destinations in the address book Select Address book and press the con troller Select New address and press the con troller g Address book A D JP RST W Z Home address Name ADAM DR TOM Select Enter address and press the con troller 151 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Enter name and address also refer to Entering a destination manually page 144 Select Store in address book and press the controller The entry is stored in the address book You can also store a destination from the desti nation list in the address book refer to page 1 The current position can be adopted into the address book Select Address book and press the con troller Change into the third field from the top Turn the controller until New address is selected and press the controller if Address book j A 0 P RST W Z Home address Name ADAM DR TOM Select Use current location as address and press the controller The name given can be changed For oper ation refer to Entering a destination manu ally page 1 Select Store in address book and press the controller You can also enter your current position into the address book if you have left the sector covered by the navigation DVD In this case you must enter a name Select Address book and press the con troller The stored entries appear on the Control
24. brake fluid tree resin or bird droppings other wise they may damage your paint Repairing paint damage Repair stone damage or scratches imme diately depending on the severity of the damage to prevent the formation of rust 4 BMW recommends having paint damage pro fessionally repaired using Genuine BMW finish materials in accordance with factory guidelines Waxing Sealant is required when water no longer beads on the clean surface of the paint Use only prod ucts that contain carnauba wax or synthetic wax to seal your finish Rubber gaskets Treat only with water or a rubber care product FN To avoid noise or damage do not use products that contain silicone to care for rubber gaskets 4 Chrome components Particularly after exposure to road salt thor oughly cleanse parts like the radiator grille door handles or window frames with plenty of water with shampoo added to it For additional treat ment use chrome polish Alloy wheels Depending on your system braking can gener ate dust which settles on the light alloy wheels Remove this dust regularly with acid free wheel cleaner Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Do not use aggressive acid containing EN strongly alkaline or coarse cleansers and do not use steam cleaners at temperatures greater than 140 F 60 C otherwise you may damage your vehicle 4 Outside sensors M Sensors outside the vehicle suc
25. ill i 02 01 Keypad Dialing a phone number from phone book or a phone number stored in a list Phone numbers you have called incoming calls and the entries of the phone book are stored in lists when the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth If the caller is entered in the phone book the name of the entry is dis played instead of the phone number You can select the desired subscriber from the list and establish the connection Five lists are available gt A Z The entries of the mobile phone phone book consisting of the name and phone number are sorted alphabetically gt Top 8 The eight numbers called most frequently from the phone book A Z are automati cally stored in the Top 8 list gt Redial The last eight phone numbers you have dialed are automatically stored The last number dialed is at the top of the list gt Missed calls The phone numbers of the last eight calls which were not accepted are stored This requires the telephone number of the caller to have been sent gt Received calls The phone numbers of the last eight accepted calls are stored This requires the telephone number of the caller to have been sent 202 Dialing a phone number from phone book The list A Z is available for your phone book entries The phone book entries appear on the Control Display 1 Select Phone and press the controller BMW Assist 4 A 7 As D 3 0 RST W
26. Activation time and press the con troller Move the controller to the left or right to select Timer 1 or Timer 2 118 eter Parked car operation s Activation time O Timer 9 30 am 9 45 am Select the time and press the controller The first setting of the time display is selected et Parked car operation Activation time O Timer O Timer 5 45 pm Turn the controller to make the adjustment Press the controller to apply the setting The next setting is selected Make the remaining adjustments After the last adjustment the time is stored Move the controller to the left or right to select Timer 1 or Timer 2 and press the controller tt Parked car operation s Activation time O Timer i 9 30 am 5 45 pm Q The activation time is activated 3 The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control lights up Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 3 The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control flashes when the parked car ventilation has switched on gt The parked car ventilation is only avail able for activation within the next 24 hours Please reactivated it after this time 4 A fe io ra lt e 119 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG ior accessories Practical inter Practical interior accessories Integrated universal remote control The co
27. Adjusting seat To ensure that the safety systems con tinue to provide optimized protection please observe the adjustment instructions on page 45 4 1 Longitudinal direction 2 Height 3 Angle 46 4 Backrest Adjusting comfort seat In this seat you can also adjust 1 2 B aims nm Backrest width Shoulder support Thigh support mh ND Lumbar support Shoulder support the adjustable upper backrest also supports the back in the shoulder region This provides a relaxed driving position and helps relieve stress on the shoulder muscles Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Lumbar support You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar region The upper hips and spinal column receive sup plementary support to help you maintain a relaxed upright sitting position gt Increase or decrease curvature press front or rear section of switch gt Shift curvature up or down press upper or lowers section of switch Adjusting active backrest width First set a comfortable backrest width see above Based on the backrest width set the lat eral support is automatically adapted to the cur rent driving situation The adaptation of the backrest width and the speed of the adjustment vary depending on the program You can select from among three pro grams from comfort to sport Button with three LEDs Press butt
28. CBC 90 Country of destination for navigation 145 Courtesy lamps 111 Cradle for telephone or mobile phone 122 Cruise control 69 active cruise control 71 Cruising range 79 Cup holders 124 Curb weight refer to Weights 263 Current consumption refer to Energy Control 79 Current position 163 Current position displaying 163 entering 152 storing 152 Curve mode with BMW Night Vision 105 Customer Relations 204 212 Cylinders refer to Engine data 260 D Dashboard refer to Cockpit 10 Data technical 260 dimensions 261 engine 260 weights 263 Date 87 Date 78 date format 87 retrieval 78 setting 87 Date format 87 Daytime running lamps 108 Daytime running lamps 108 Deactivated 49 Defect door lock 32 fuel filler door 220 glass sunroof 42 luggage compartment lid 34 panorama glass sunroof 44 tailgate 35 Defrosting windows 115 Defrosting windows and removing condensation 115 Defrosting windshield refer to Defrosting windows 115 Defrost position refer to Defrosting windows 115 Delete address book in navigation 153 Delete all numbers in mobile phone mode 203 Delete data in navigation 153 Delete in mobile phone mode 203 Destination address deleting 153 entering 144 147 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Destination for navigation destination list 150
29. PDC Park Distance Control 89 Personal Profile 28 Perspective 158 Phone 196 198 201 Phone book 200 changing entry 202 creating and editing voice phone book 206 deleting all entries 203 deleting entry 203 dialing phone number 202 Phone numbers deleting from phone book 203 dialing 201 most recent numbers 203 selecting in phone book 203 Top 8 203 Pinch protection system glass sunroof electric 42 panorama glass sunroof 43 power windows 40 Plasters refer to First aid kit 254 Plug in unit for remote control refer to Ignition lock 61 Polish 241 Pollen refer to Microfilter activated charcoal filter 117 Position refer to Displaying current position 163 refer to Storing current position 152 Power failure 251 Power windows refer to Windows 40 Preselecting activation times of the parked car ventilation 118 Presets in radio mode 172 179 Pressure tires 222 282 Pressure monitoring of tires refer to TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 96 Profile 216 Programmable buttons on steering wheel 54 Programmable memory buttons 21 Protective function refer to Pinch protection system glass sunroof electric 42 panorama glass sunroof 43 windows 40 R Radio autostore 174 controls 168 High Definition Radio 176 sampling stations 173 satellite radio 178 selecting frequency manually 173 select
30. Sports Wagon Three additional mounting points for child restraint systems with a tether strap are pro vided under covers in the cargo bay floor refer to arrows Remove the corresponding covers before use Placement of tether strap Make sure that the upper retaining strap EN is not routed over sharp edges and does not twist on its way to the upper mounting point otherwise the belt may not properly secure the child restraint system in the event of an acci dent lt 58 Outer rear seat Sedan lt a Outer rear seats Sports Wagon Direction of travel Head restraints Hook of upper retaining strap Mounting point a fh N Rear window shelf luggage compartment floor Backrest NI Upper retaining strap of child restraint sys tem Fold upward or remove covers before using the mounting points 1 Slide the head restraint upward 2 Thread the upper retaining strap between the head restraint supports Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 3 Sports Wagon thread the retaining strap between the backrest and the roll up cover Make sure that the rear backrest is locked in position ee 7 4 Attach the retaining strap hook to the mounting point 5 Slide the head restraint into the bottom position 6 Pull the retaining strap taut Center rear seat 1 Fold the center armrest somewhat toward the front 2 Guide retaining strap through the ope
31. The route is planned according to fixed rules The type of road is taken into account e g whether it is a highway or a winding road The road types are stored on the navigation DVD As aresult the routes recommended by the navigation system may not always be the same ones that you would choose based on personal experience Changing route criteria 1 Select Navigation and press the control ler 2 Change into the third field from the top Turn the controller until Route preference is selected and press the controller Navigation New destination e SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY WA Route list Arrow display The various criteria are listed on the Control Display 3 Select a route criterion for the route gt With highways Freeways and major traffic arteries are given priority gt Avoid highways Freeways are avoided where possible gt Fast route The short traveling time being a combi nation of the shortest possible route and the fastest roads gt Short route Short route irrespective of how fast or slow progress will be 154 4 Press the controller D Avoid highways Fast route Short route Dynamic route Avoid tollraads Q The route criterion is selected 5 If necessary select an additional route cri terion and then press the controller gt Dynamic route Automatic changing of the route in case of traffic obstructions Depending on ro
32. Tone control 170 Trip computer 81 Trip computer 80 Trip distance counter refer to Trip computer 80 refer to Trip meter 78 Triple turn signal 67 Trip meter 78 also refer to Trip computer 80 Trip odometer refer to Trip meter 78 Trunk refer to Cargo bay Trunk lid refer to Tailgate 35 Turning circle refer to Dimensions 261 Turning lamps 109 replacing bulbs 246 Turn signals 67 indicator lamp 12 replacing bulbs 246 U Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQR 228 Units 88 Units average fuel consumption 88 temperature 88 Universal garage door opener refer to Integrated universal remote control 120 Universal remote control 120 Unlock button 30 Unlocking from inside 33 from outside 30 setting unlocking behavior 30 without key refer to Comfort access 38 Unlocking without key refer to Comfort access 38 Update services 215 USB audio interface 188 USB in audio mode 189 Use current location as address 152 153 Used batteries refer to Disposal 251 refer to Replacing battery 40 Using turn signals 67 V Valve screw caps refer to After mounting 250 Vehicle battery 251 breaking in 134 loading 137 measurements refer to Dimensions 261 parking 62 weights 263 Vehicle Tires in unlocking 30 Vehicle care refer to Care 239 Vehicle jack 249 jacking points 250 Vehicle position
33. V up to 150 mph 240 km h W up to 167 mph 270 km h Y up to 186 mph 300 km h Tire Identification Number Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U S Department of Transportation DOT code e g DOT xxxx xxx 1008 Manufacturer code for tire make Tire size and tire design Tire age 227 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Wheels and tires Tire age The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding DOT 1008 indicates that the tire was manufactured in week 10 of 2008 BMW recommends that you replace all tires after 6 years at most even if some tires may last for 10 years Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Tread wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A DOT Quality Grades Tread wear Traction AA ABC Temperature ABC T All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades Tread wear The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use how e
34. You can use the cursor to select the destination on the map and then adopt it into the destination guidance 1 Select Navigation and press the control ler New destination is selected 2 Press the controller SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY WY Route pre ference Arrow display i Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 3 Select Input map and press the controller ll Information UNITED STATES Town City Street House number Intersection A section of a map is displayed on the Con trol Display gt During destination guidance around the current destination gt With the destination guidance deacti vated around the last destination entered 4 Select destination with cursor gt Changing scale turn the controller gt Moving map move the controller in the corresponding direction The controller can be moved to the left right forward and back 5 Toadoptor store the destination in the des tination guidance system press the con troller The selected destination and other menu items are displayed 6 Select the desired menu item gt Start route guidance starts destination guidance gt Show current position places the cur rent position in the center of the map gt Show destination position places the current destination in the center of the map gt Return to map changes back to the Input map
35. ba Enabled Assist services Into sources Display ob a gt Audio Emergency call Display settings Traffic Info Concierge Roadside Assistance My Into Steering wheel buttons i Vehicle Tires Lad nguage i Units Time Date Select Update services and press the controller Turn the controller until BMW Service set tings is selected and press the controller BMW Assist must be activated to use the ser Ven Settings vices E Vehicle Tires 8 Language Units v Time Date Make sure that the vehicle can determine its Traffic info settinas current position Reception is best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky Leave the ignition switched on during the fs Bluetooth activation process Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Enabled Assist services is selected and press the controller Press the MENU button o oo O This opens the start menu Assist pro Enables Currently FVICES Communication no services enabled AR Fi i FH Navigation Entertainment Select Enable services and press the con troller Press the controller to open the j menu BMW Assist is enabled and the data exchange with the BMW Assist Response Center begins 215 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Select BMW Service settings and press the controller i Enabled services gt Progress CTITITIIL y Vehicle
36. ditions traffic applicable laws and State driving recommendations for safe following distance Otherwise a violation of the law or risk of an accident could result 4 Interrupting cruise control Pas Press the lever upward or downward and with the vehicle stopped also depress the brake pedal The marking in the soeedometer changes color and the distance indicator goes out l ee R i ha ES O In addition the system is automatically inter rupted gt when you apply the vehicle brakes gt when you shift the transmission gt when DTC is activated or DSC is deacti vated gt when DSC comes on V when you apply the handbrake gt when you release the safety belt and open the driver s door with the vehicle stopped gt when the system does not recognize any objects for an extended period of time e g on infrequently traveled roads without a shoulder or guard rails or if the radar sensor is covered with dirt refer to page 75 If the system is interrupted then it is nec essary for the driver to actively intervene by braking and steering Otherwise there is a risk of an accident 4 Resuming stored desired speed and distance While driving Press button 4 The displays appear in the instrument cluster 73 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG iving Dr While stopped Before leaving the vehicle with the engine EN running eng
37. gt 4 Exit the menu cet EE a SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY STREET M Show current position Show destination position Return to map 7 Press the controller The map for the destination entry can also be displayed in the map display Select the Ei symbol and press the controller Selecting destination using information You can obtain a display of selected destina tions e g hotels sights or hospitals and adopt them into the destination guidance 1 Select Navigation and press the control ler 2 Select Information and press the control ler Traffic Info On destination On location On a new destination 3 Select location gt On destination gt On location gt On anew destination 149 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG c e _ gt Destination entry ap Information p On destination On a TEW destination Press the controller 5 Make your selection e g Hotels and res taurants and press the controller 6 Enter search criteria if necessary e g the maximum distance from the current loca tion 7 Select lt Start search gt and press the con troller These destinations are displayed on the Control Display 1 30f 22 LAX LOS ANGELES CA amp 9 5 mis STAR HOTEL BEVERLY HILLS BEVERLY HILLS GRETER Y BLVD gt 7 1 mis BELLA VISTA HOTEL BEVERLY HILLS REXFORD OR 8 Select a
38. gt For pairing specify any desired number as the Bluetooth passkey e g 1 This Blue tooth passkey is no longer required follow ing successful pairing The ignition is switched on Only pair the mobile phone with the vehi cle stopped otherwise the passengers and other road users can be endangered due to a lack of attentiveness on the part of the driver lt Insert the remote control as far as possible into the ignition lock Switch on the ignition by pressing the Start Stop button without depressing the brake or clutch pedal Vehicle Tires Language Units Time Date Traffic info settinas BMW Service settings 195 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG m c E E e O Change into the second field from the top select Phone and press the controller J Bluetooth Settings Help Pair newphone Phones previously paired No entries available Select Pair new phone and press the con troller FF Bluetooth i PRANE Phones previously paired No entries available Select Start pairing and press the control ler Help Please use phones recommended by BMW for best performance www bmw com bluetoath The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played Bluetooth name of your BMW BMW 76002 Start pairing your Bluetooth phone Please enter a passkey PIN when asked to do so Additional information Is contained in the
39. io Stopwatch Change limit 50 mph Select current speed 5 Select the speed value and press the con troller Turn the controller to set the limit 7 Press the controller to apply the setting The limit is activated Applying your current speed as limit Select Select current speed and press the controller The system adopts your current speed as the limit Activating deactivating limit Select On and press the controller Wf The limit is activated Stopwatch iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Open the start menu 2 Open Navigation Without navigation system Open Car Data 3 Select Car Data and press the controller 85 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Select Stopwatch and press the control ler 00 06 1 3 ae time 00 00 45 reset Reset Select Start and press the controller The stopwatch starts at the displayed time Select Reset and press the controller The stopwatch is reset and it restarts if it was running beforehand Select Stop and press the controller Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller Display olp lt Info sources aq Audio J Display settings vip Steel Ing wheel buttons Vehicle Tires vF la nguage Units A9 Time Date Turn the controller until Time Date is selected and press the controller VE Settings i F
40. manual destination entry Enter address REXFORD DRIVE 455 Intersection Add to destination list gt Select Start guidance and press the con troller Destination guidance starts immediately gt Ifthe destination guidance does not need to be started immediately Select Add to destination list and press the controller The destination is stored in the destination list refer to page 150 Entering destination via voice You can enter a desired destination via the voice command system When entering the destination it is possible to change between voice command and iDrive at any time Reacti vate the voice command function for this pur pose if necessary Dl With Options you can have the possible commands read aloud 4 1 Press the ES button on the steering wheel wr 2 Enter address so Enter address Town City Street House number Intersection Selecting country 1 Wait for the system to ask for the country of destination we 2 Say the name of the country of destina tion Say the name of the country of destination in the language of the voice command system Entering destination The destination can be spelled or entered as an entire word To enter the destination spell it using the orthography of the country of destination Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal volume avoiding excessive emphasis and pauses nf 1 Spell town city name Say at lea
41. not feel competent to perform yourself or that is not described here gt Never touch the glass of new bulbs with _ your bare fingers as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb s surface and reduce its service life Use a clean cloth napkin etc or hold the bulb by its metal socket lt 4 A selection of replacement bulbs is available at your BMW center Only replace bulbs when cool as other wise you may be burned lt Whenever you perform any work on the electrical system turn off the systems consumers involved to prevent short circuits from occurring To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer 4 When caring for the headlamps please follow the instructions under Care starting on page 239 For bulbs for which changing Is not _ described and for checking and adjusting headlamp aim please contact your BMW cen ter Light emitting diodes LEDs Light emitting diodes installed behind translu cent lenses serve as the light source for many of the controls and displays in your vehicle These light emitting diodes which operate using a concept similar to that applied in conventional lasers are officially designated as Class 1 light emitting diodes A Do not remove the covers and never stare into the unfiltered light for several hours as irritation of the retina could result 4 244 Halogen
42. refer to Displaying current position 163 Ventilation 117 draft free 117 in rear 117 while stationary 117 287 Oo cD fia Gen 9 ad Everything from A to Z Venting refer to Ventilation 117 Vent outlets 113 refer to Ventilation 117 Vent outlets of automatic climate control 113 Vents refer to Ventilation 117 Vent settings 115 Viscosity 235 Voice refer to Destination guidance with voice instructions 159 Voice command system overview 23 short commands 265 Voice instructions for navigation system 159 muting 55 repeating 55 160 switching on off 55 159 volume 160 Voice phone book 206 Volume 168 audio sources 168 cargo bay 263 fuel tank refer to Capacities 264 mobile phone 200 setting speed dependent 170 voice instructions 160 windshield cleaning system refer to Capacities 264 W Warning lamps refer to Indicator and warning lamps 13 Warning messages refer to Check Control 83 Warning on leaving lane refer to Leaving lane warning 105 Warning triangle 253 Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models 237 Washer fluid 69 capacity of the reservoir 69 288 Waste container refer to Ashtray 124 Water on roads refer to Driving through water 136 Water penetration 239 240 Waveband for radio 172 WB 168 176 Wear indicators in tires refer to Minimum tread depth 2
43. the LED flashes Even if you are unable to answer the BMW Assist Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain conditions If conditions allow remain in the vehicle until the connection has been established You will then be able to provide a detailed description of the situation If the current position of your vehicle can be determined it will be transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Response Center cannot be heard over the hands free system it is possible that the hands free system is malfunctioning The BMW Assist Response Center may still be able to hear you though Under certain conditions an emergency request is automatically initiated immediately after a severe accident Pressing the button does not interfere with this For technical reasons the emergency request cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable condi tions You can also use other services of BMW Assist with this button refer to page 209 4 Warning triangle The warning triangle is located in the luggage compartment lid tailgate 253 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG gt z O istance iving and receiving ass G Sedan Loosen the wing nut to open Sports Wagon Release the two quick release fasteners and fold down the trim piece First aid kit Some of the articles contained in the first aid kit have a limited se
44. 08 BMW AG You can have the roads and towns along the route displayed during destination guidance The distances remaining to be traveled on each individual road are also displayed Select Navigation and press the control ler Change into the third field from the top Turn the controller until Route list is selected and press the controller i Navigation New destination SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY WA Route preference New rc Arrow display To exit the menu 45 Select the arrow and press the controller A i 0 5 mis SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY STREET During destination guidance voice instructions can be switched on or off in the arrow or map view Select the m symbol and press the controller To switch the voice instructions on and off at any time Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller Display o p lt gt Into sources vad Audio 2 Display settings vi Steering wheel buttons ve Vehicle Tires Language Units Time Date Turn the controller until Language Units is selected and press the controller Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Languages is selected and press the controller Linits Text language English US O Navigati n voice INnStructians D Arrow display pop up instructi
45. 204 BMW homepage 4 BMW maintenance system 237 BMW Night Vision 103 activating 104 cleaning camera 105 cleaning camera refer to Wiper system 68 deactivating 104 making settings 104 BMW Service settings 214 BMW TeleServices 211 BMW TeleServices services displaying 212 updating 212 BMW website 4 Bottle holder refer to Cup holders 124 Bracket for telephone or mobile phone refer to Snap in adapter 207 Brake assistant 90 adaptive 91 Brake force display 99 Brake lamps replacing bulbs 246 two stage 99 Brake rotors breaking in 134 refer to Braking safely 136 272 Brakes ABS Antilock Brake System 90 brake assistant 90 brake force display 99 breaking in 134 CBC Cornering Brake Control 90 electronic brake force distribution 90 handbrake 63 refer to Braking safely 136 warning lamps 13 Brake system 134 brake pads 134 breaking in 134 disk brakes 136 warning lamp 93 Braking safely 136 Breakdown services refer to Roadside Assistance 254 Breaking in brake pads 134 Breaking in the clutch 134 Breaking in the differential refer to Engine and differential 134 Break in period 134 Brightness 88 102 with BMW Night Vision 105 Brightness of Control Display 87 Button for starting engine refer to Start Stop button 61 Buttons on steering wheel 11 C California Proposition 6
46. 300 miles 500 km During this break in period engage the clutch gently 134 Following part replacement Observe the break in instructions again if com ponents mentioned above must be replaced after subsequent driving operation Saving fuel The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends on various factors Through a few simple steps your driving style and regular maintenance you can have a positive influence on your fuel con sumption and environmental impact Removing unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption Removing add on parts after use Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors roof or rear luggage racks after use Add on parts attached to the vehicle impede the aerodynamics and increase the fuel consumption Closing windows and glass sunroof An open glass sunroof or open windows like wise increase the drag coefficient and therefore the fuel consumption Checking tire inflation pressures regularly Check and correct the tire inflation pressure as needed at least twice a month and before long trips An insufficient tire inflation pressure increases the rolling resistance and thus increases the fuel consumption and tire wear Driving off immediately Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it running while the vehicle remains stationary Instead begin to drive at a moderate engine speed This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature Online Edition
47. 4 Move the controller to the left or right to select Driver or Passenger f Seat heater distribution 5 Turn the controller to adjust the distribu tion The setting is applied Temperature distribution with active seat ventilation The heat output can be distributed variously in the seat cushion and the backrest iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Open the start menu 2 Move the controller to the left to open Cli mate 91 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Adjusting 3 Select Driver s seat climate or Passen ger s seat climate and press the controller Turn the controller to adjust the distribution The setting is applied Rear Operation similar to front seat heating two tem perature levels without temperature distribu tion Active seat ventilation The appearance and arrangement of the but tons may vary depending on the equipment 1 Active seat ventilation 2 Active seat ventilation with seat heating 52 Press the respective button once per ventila tion level The ventilation level appears on the Control Display The maximum level is supplied when three LEDs are lit The air quantity is reduced and if need be the ventilation is switched off in order to reduce the load on the battery The LEDs remain lit To switch off press button longer D The highest level is used for rapid cooling e g when the vehicle h
48. Easy entry exit 54 backrest width 47 Eject button refer to Buttons in area of CD player 168 Y S L H 275 U ag Everything from A to Z Electrical malfunction door lock 32 driver s door 32 fuel filler door 220 glass sunroof electric 42 luggage compartment lid 34 panorama glass sunroof 44 tailgate 35 Electric steering wheel adjustment 54 Electronic brake force distribution 90 Electronic oil level check 234 Emergency operation refer to Manual operation door lock 32 driver s door 32 fuel filler door 220 luggage compartment lid 34 tailgate 35 transmission lock automatic transmission 65 Emergency operation refer to Moving manually glass sunroof 42 panorama glass sunroof 44 Emergency release for luggage compartment lid in cargo bay 34 Emergency request 253 Emergency services refer to Roadside Assistance 254 Enabled services 215 Enabled TeleServices 212 Enable services 215 End call 202 Energy conscious driving refer to Energy Control 79 Energy Control 79 Engine breaking in 134 data 260 overheated refer to Coolant temperature 78 speed 260 starting 62 Starting with comfort access 38 switching off 62 276 Engine compartment 233 Engine coolant 235 Engine oil adding 235 additives refer to Approved engine oils 235 approved engine oil 235 checking
49. Push the slide in the lower compartment upward Tr Depending on the automatic climate con trol setting the temperature inside the ventilated compartment may be higher than in the rest of the interior Should this be the case push the slide downward to close off the venti lation Adjusting v i O Push the illustrated section of the center arm rest into the desired position Connection for external audio device You can connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over the vehicle s speaker system gt AUX In connection refer to page 187 gt USB audio interface refer to page 188 Storage compartments Storage compartments are located on the doors in the front center console and in the rear Storage nets are located on the backrests of the front seats and a net is provided in the front passenger footwell Do not stow hard or sharp edged objects in the storage nets or the net otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in an acci dent lt Clothes hooks Clothes hooks are located near the grab han dles in the rear When hanging clothing on the hooks ensure that it will not obstruct the driver s vision Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks If you do so they could cause personal injury to occupants during braking or evasive maneu vers lt 4 123 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG ior accessor
50. The satellite radio has no influence on this The signal may not be available in tunnels or af CHODI Channel underground garages next to tall buildings Details hannel B near trees mountains or other sources of radio pater hannel C interference Tone hannel D Reception is usually possible again as soon as LESN E anneal E the signal is available again 4 jazz Presets is displayed 4 Turn the controller to select a memory loca tion and press the controller a SAT Presets I CH 007 Channel A CH TIE Channel C CH 004 Channel D CH 005 Channel E The channelis stored The channels of the last selection criterion are displayed once again after a short time Changing channel with buttons next to CD player Press the EMA button for the corresponding direction The system changes to the next enabled chan nel 180 online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG CD player and CD changer Listening to CDs Compressed audio files CDs with compressed audio files i e MP3 can be played by the CD player but not by the CD changer CD player starting CD With two drives The upper drive is for audio CDs Inserting CD Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side up The CD is retracted Playback starts automatically if the sound out put is on For CDs with compressed audio files it can take up to approx 1 minute to read in the data dependi
51. a maximum of 1 25 miles 2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours When tires are warm the tire inflation pressure increases Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it as needed even on the compact tire at least twice a month and before starting long trips Otherwise driving instability or tire damage and therefore accidents can result from incorrect tire inflation pressures Do not drive with depressurized i e flat tires except run flat tires A flat tire will seriously impair your vehicle s handling and braking response Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to a loss of control over the vehicle 4 gt After correcting the tire inflation pressure reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor refer to page 94 or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor refer to page 96 4 Pressure specifications The tables below provide all the correct inflation pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature gt The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes and tire brands respectively approved and recommended by BMW a list of these is available from your BMW center lt 4 222 For correct identification of the right tire infla tion pressure for your tires observe the follow Ing gt Tire sizes of your vehicle gt Load conditions gt Maximum allowable driving speed Tire inflation pressures for speeds up to 100 mph 160 km h For normal driving up to 100 mph
52. and activated Display for gt ENewentries present in Missed calls gt Roaming active Telephoning is possible if the mobile phone is paired in the vehicle atl Reception strength of mobile phone network dependent on mobile phone Time Other displays The status information is temporarily hidden when there are Check Control instructions or inputs via the voice command system 20 Assistance window TARTE 194 3 Additional information appears in the assis tance window gt gt gt The computer or the trip computer The arrow or map view with a navigation system The current position Selecting display i Move the controller to the right to change to the assistance window and press the con troller Maga dla tul irnir Y Bernpoctive Aarma LES Current potiti 2 3 Select a menu item Press the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Switching assistance window off on 1 Move the controller to the right to change to the assistance window and press the con troller 2 Select Assist window off and press the controller Peerguet tree Arrow ipy Ciureni potion KLUS u ie comptent 75 rte info TERGO Em m Y k Lin FE S itz 2100 5 Sav ee weet To switch on change to the assistance window and press the controller Switching Control Display off on 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu
53. and closing Using remote control Persons or animals left unattended in a EN parked vehicle can lock the doors from the inside Always take along the remote control when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside 4 Unlocking Press the button The interior lamps the courtesy lamps and the welcome lamps are switched on Setting unlocking behavior You can set whether the first press of the button unlocks only the driver s door or the entire vehi cle iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 30 3 Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Door locks is selected and press the controller Lae PDC Lighting Central locking Unlock button All doors Last seat pos After door opened O Relock door if not opened O Lock after driving 6 Select Central locking and press the con troller 7 Select Unlock button and press the con troller 8 Select a menuitem gt All doors Pressing the d button once unlocks the entire vehicle gt Driver s door only Pressing the Ed button once unlocks the driver s door and the fuel filler door Pressing the button twice unlocks the entire vehicle Door locks Central
54. and tires Have new wheels and tires installed only by your BMW center or tire shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel If this work is not carried out properly there is a dan ger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards Make sure that the new wheels are bal anced 4 gt z O 229 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Wheels and tires Retreaded tires BMW does not recommend that you use EN retreaded tires as driving safety may be impaired The causes for this include the possi bly different tire casing structures and the often wide variations in their age which can result ina limited service life 4 The right wheels and tires BMW recommends that you use only wheel and tire combinations that BMW has tested and approved for your particular vehicle Variations in factors such as manufac turing tolerances mean that even wheels and tires with identical official size ratings could actually have different dimensions than the approved units these differences could lead to body contact and with it the risk of severe acci dents If non approved wheels and tires are used BMW cannot evaluate their suitability and therefore cannot be held liable for driving safety lt You can inquire about the right wheel tire com bination at your BMW center The correct wheel tire combination also affects various systems whose function wou
55. automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a Substitute for your personal judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions For example the sensors cannot detect fog of hazy weather To avoid safety risks you should always switch on the low beams manually under these conditions 4 Welcome lamps If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3 when parking the vehicle then when you unlock the vehicle the parking lamps and interior light ing remain illuminated for a brief time Activating deactivating welcome lamps iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 107 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Lamps 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Lighting is selected and press the controller Door locks gt O Triple turn signal O Daytime running lamps Pathway lighting 240s O High beam assistant O Welcome light 6 Select Welcome light and press the con troller K The welcome lamps are switched on The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Pathway lighting When you activate the headlamp flasher after parking the vehicle and switching off the lamps the low
56. be notice ably reduced Even if the position of the vehicle IS normal go to the nearest BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per sonnel FTM Flat Tire Monitor The concept The Flat Tire Monitor detects a pressure loss in one tire by comparing the speeds of the individ ual wheels during driving In the event of a pressure loss there is a change in the rolling circumference and therefore the rotation speed of the corresponding wheel The system detects this change and reports it as a flat tire Functional requirement In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire the system must be initialized for the cor rect tire inflation pressure gt The initialization must be repeated after each time the tire inflation pressure is cor rected and after every tire or wheel change lt 4 94 System limits The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate sudden severe tire damage caused by outside factors and does not detect a natural even pressure drop in all four tires In the following situations the system could be delayed or malfunction gt System has not been initialized gt Driving on snowy or slippery road surface gt Sporty driving style slip in the drive wheels high lateral acceleration gt Driving with snow chains When you are driving with the compact wheel the Flat Tire Monitor is unable to function Initializing system gt
57. braking and steering maneuvers Standard tires 2 Check whether your vehicle is equipped with standard tires or run flat tires gt You will recognize run flat tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire refer to page 229 4 1 If all four wheels are shown in yellow iden tify the damaged tire on the vehicle ir e L mur e O 2 Replace the damaged wheel or wheels refer to Changing wheels on page 248 In contrast to acompact wheel a spare wheel is equipped with the necessary TPM electronics and also monitored after mounting and after resetting the system Have the tire replaced by a BMW center or a workshop informed on handling TPM which works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel Run flat tires 1 Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph 80 km h Avoid severe braking and steering maneuvers and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h If the vehicle is not equipped with run flat tires refer to page 229 do not continue driving Continuing to drive with a flat tire could cause severe accidents lt 2 Inthe event of complete tire pressure loss O psi 0 kPa you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guide values gt With alight load 1 to 2 persons without luggage approx 155 miles 250 km gt With a medium load 2 persons cargo bay full or 4 persons w
58. can establish a telephone connection A prerequisite for this is that your Bluetooth mobile phone has been paired with the vehicle Press Select as destination to transfer the address to the navigation system for desti nation guidance Using the BMW Assist Internet portal you can transmit addresses and phone numbers into the vehicle using text messages Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Move the controller forward to select Communication Change to upper field if necessary Select BMW Assist and press the control ler 213 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG BMW Assist 4 Select My Info and press the controller i BMW Assist My Info Lei 10 05 New winter tires have arrived ltt 06 09 Child seat attachment with bl The transmitted messages are automatically displayed You can receive and display up to amaximum of ten messages Additional messages can only be received once old messages have been deleted In order to display an existing message Select message and press the controller If you have received a message with a phone number then you can send it to your mobile phone provided that your phone has been paired with the vehicle If you have received a message with an address then you can send it to your navigation sys tem 1 Select message and press the controller 2 Select Options and press the controller Select the desire
59. controller a ghti ngo Door locks Delete address book 6 Select Delete address book and press the controller 7 Select Yes and press the controller Storing home address You can store your current position or the cur rent destination as the home address in the address book This entry occupies the second position in the address book 1 Select Address book and press the con troller 2 Change into the third field from the top Turn the controller until Home address is selected and press the controller y a Address book ACP RST 7 New address ADAM DR TOM JULIA 3 Select Use current location as address or Save current destination during the desti nation guidance and press the controller 4 Select Store in address book and press the controller 1 Select Home address and press the con troller 2 Select Start guidance and press the con troller 1 Select Home address and press the con troller 2 Select Edit address and press the con troller For operation refer to Entering a destination manually page 144 153 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG O 2 2 gt Z Destination entry Selecting route You can influence the calculated route by choosing certain route criteria You can change the route criteria as often as you like while entering the destination and whenever the des tination guidance is active
60. destination and press the control ler The scope of the information and symbols is dependent on the respec tive navigation DVD lt 9 Select the desired menu item gt To adopt the address in the destination list and start the destination guidance Select the me symbol and press the controller gt To establish a telephone connection Select the symbol and press the con troller gt To display additional destinations Select the 4 symbol and press the controller gt To start a new search Select the symbol and press the con troller To exit the menu 45 Select the arrow and press the controller Symbols in map view If for example you have selected the category Hotels the hotels are shown on the map as symbols To hide the symbols in the map view 1 Select the symbol and press the controller NN WEST HOLLYWOOD 2 Select Hide map icons and press the con troller The symbols are hidden To display the symbols Select Show map icons and press the con troller To exit the menu d Select the arrow and press the controller Destination list The last 20 entered destinations are shown in the destination list You can display these desti nations and adopt them in the destination guid ance system For example to plan a longer route you can store all destinations you want to drive to in advance in the destination list refer to Entering a destination manually
61. gas values worsen Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible SERVICE ENGINE SOON Display of the previously described KA malfunction in Canadian models The lamp flashes under certain conditions This is a sign of excessive misfiring of the engine In this case you should reduce speed and drive to the nearest BMW center as soon as possible Heavy engine misfiring causes serious damage to the emission relevant components espe cially the catalytic converter within a short time gt If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight ened the OBD system will assume that fuel vapor escapes Then a display lights up If the cap is then tightened the display will go out within a few days lt 238 Event Data Recorders Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev eral measuring and diagnosis modules or with a device for recording or transmitting certain vehicle data or information If you have also sub scribed to BMW Assist certain vehicle data can be transmitted or recorded to enable corre sponding services Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Care Car care products Regular cleaning and care make a significant contribution to retaining your BMW s value For the cleaning and care of your vehicle BMW recommends using only products that BMW has approved for this purpose Your BMW Service will be glad to advise you about products and services for the cleaning and care of yo
62. headlamps The illustration shows the left hand side of the engine compartment Q 1 Cover cap for low beams 2 Cover cap for high beams To remove the cover caps gt Low beams press the detent arrow and remove the cover from the guide gt High beams turn the cover cap to the left and remove A Always wear gloves and eye protection i the atmosphere within the H7 bulb is pressurized Otherwise there is a danger of inju ries if the bulb is accidentally damaged during replacement lt Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Low beams H7 bulb 55 watts 1 Turnthe bulb holder to the left and remove 2 Remove and replace the bulb High beams H7 bulb 55 watts 1 Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove 2 Remove and replace the bulb Parking and roadside parking lamps In the event of a malfunction please go to your BMW center or a workshop that works accord ing to BMW repair procedures with correspond ingly trained personnel Xenon lamps The service life of these bulbs is very long and the probability of a failure is very low provided that they are not switched on and off an unusual number of times If one of these bulbs should nevertheless fail it is possible to continue driv ing with great caution using the fog lamps pro vided traffic laws in your area do not prohibit this A Have work on the xenon lighting system performed only by your BMW center or a
63. im Malfunction E The warning lamp lights up yellow and Le E Ce a message is shown on the Control Dis L play The active steering is no longer operational At low speeds greater steering On the left normal braking wheel movements are required whereas at higher speeds the vehicle reacts more sensi tively to steering wheel movements The stabil ity promoting intervention can also be deacti vated Proceed cautiously and drive defensively Have the system checked LL e mur e O On the right heavy braking Airbags The following airbags are located under the the event of side impact The relevant side air marked covers bag supports the side upper body area The 1 Front airbags head air bag supports the head 2 Head airbags The airbags are deliberately not triggered in every impact situation e g less severe acci 3 Side airbags in front and rear Ke dents or rear end collisions Do not apply adhesive materials to the cover panels of the airbags cover them or modify them in any other way Do not attempt to remove the airbag restraint system from the vehicle Do not modify or tamper with either the Protective action To ensure that the safety systems con tinue to provide optimized protection please observe the adjustment instructions on pagesas wiring or the individual components in the air The front airbags help protect the driver and bag system This category includes the uphol fr
64. is deactivated refer to page 98 A message appears on the Control Display Please note any supplementary information that appears there Toincrease vehicle stability activate DSC again as soon as possible Activating DSC Press the button the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out For better control The indicator lamp flashes A DSC controls the drive forces and brake forces The indicator lamp lights up DSC is deactivated v i O DTC Dynamic Traction Control DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out put is optimized for particular road conditions e g unplowed snow covered roads The sys tem assures the maximal drive output but with reduced driving stability It is therefore neces sary to drive with appropriate caution You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances gt When driving on snowy inclines in slush or on unplowed snow covered road surfaces gt When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start ing off in deep snow or on loose ground gt When driving with snow chains Activating DTC DTC Press the button briefly the DTC indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up 91 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Technology for comfort convenience and safety For better control The indicator lamp flashes A DTC controls the drive forces and brake forces The indicat
65. is selected and press the controller 7 Select desired information of Head Up Dis play JF Head Up Display Head Up Display EY ACC Lane departure warning EY Navigation RY Check Control messages 8 Press the controller Er The information appears in the Head Up Display The settings are stored for the remote control Currently in use Setting brightness The brightness of the display is adapted to the ambient lighting conditions However you can change the basic setting With the low beams switched on the brightness can also be adjusted with the knurled wheel of the instrument lighting iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Display settings and press the controller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Head Up Display is selected and press the controller 102 6 Change into the second field from the top Turn the controller until Brightness is selected and press the controller c JE Head Up Display Head Up Display Brightness nmm 7 Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Notes The visibility of the displays in the Head Up Dis play is influenced by gt Sunglasses with certain polarizat
66. locking LU All doors After door opene L 7 ft es E Driver s door only OD Relock door if not opened O Lock after driving 9 Press the controller The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Comfort opening Press and hold the j button The windows and the glass sunroof open Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Locking Press the Lock button Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if persons are inside as unlocking from the inside is not possible without special knowl edge 4 Switching on interior lamps With vehicle locked Press the Lock button You can also use this function to locate your vehicle in parking garages etc Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system in case of dan ger Press the button for at least 3 seconds Switching off alarm press any button Sedan opening luggage compartment lid Press the EJ button for approx 1 second The luggage compartment lid opens regard less of whether it was previously locked or unlocked gt During opening the luggage compart ment lid pivots back and up Make sure that adequate clearance is available before opening To prevent accidentally locking yourself out never lay the remote control in the cargo bay A previously locked luggage compartment lid is also locked again after closing 4 Sports Wagon unlocking tailgate Press the EJ button for approx 1 second The tail
67. mirrors in and out up to a speed of approx 20 mph 30 km h This is advantageous for example in car washes narrow streets or for bringing mir rors that have been manually folded in back into the correct position Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx 25 mph 40 km h Before going through a car wash fold the mirrors in manually or with button 3 oth erwise they could be damaged depending on the width of the car wash system 4 Automatic heating Below a certain outdoor temperature both exterior mirrors are heated whenever the engine is running or the ignition is switched on Tilting down passenger side exterior mirror automatic curb monitor Activating 1 Slide switch into the driver s side mirror position arrow 1 v O i O p i m y 2 Shiftinto reverse or move selector lever into position R The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat on the passenger s side This allows the driver to see the area immediately adjacent to the vehicle such as a curb when park Ing etc Deactivating Slide switch into the passenger side mirror position arrow 2 Interior rearview mirror To reduce the dazzle effect of following vehi cles at night turn the knob 53 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Adjusting Interior and exterior mirrors automatic dimming feature This feature is controlled by
68. must not lie across the neck rub against sharp edges be routed over solid or breakable objects or be pinched Wear the safety belt without twisting snugly across the lap and shoulders as close to the body as possible Otherwise the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the belt from fitting properly and pull the belt in the upper body area periodically to readjust the tension in order to avoid a reduction in the restraint of the safety belt Sports Wagon if the center safety belt in the rear is used the larger backrest half must be locked refer to page 127 otherwise the middle safety belt has no restraining action 4 Safety belts refer to page 50 45 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Adjusting Seats Note before adjusting Never attempt to adjust your seat while the vehicle is moving The seat could respond with unexpected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident Also on the passenger side do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is being driven otherwise there is a danger in the event of an accident of sliding under the safety belt eliminating the protection normally pro vided by the belt 4 Please follow the instructions on damage to safety belts provided on page 51 and the infor mation on the active front head restraints on page 49
69. owner s manual LA 196 Additional operations must be carried out on the mobile phone and differ depending on the model refer to the operating instruc tions of your mobile phone e g find con nect or pair under Bluetooth device The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is also shown on the mobile phone display Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display Depending on your mobile phone you will first be requested consecutively via the display of your mobile phone or iDrive to enter the Blue tooth passkey you specified Enter the Bluetooth passkey Depending on the mobile phone approx 30 seconds are available for entering the Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone and on the Control Display MEFE Confirm passkey 456 Change into the third field from the top select Confirm passkey and press the controller Wait a few seconds until the Communica tion menu appears The next time you use the mobile phone in the vehicle interior it will be detected within a max imum of 2 minutes with the engine running or the ignition switched on gt With some mobile phone models it may be necessary to make certain settings for _ a permanent Bluetooth link e g via the menu item Authorization or Secure connection Refer to the operating instructions of your mobile phone 4 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG As soon as a mobile phone is detected by
70. rear backrests refer to Expanding cargo bay 2 Unlock the case on both sides with the but tons arrow 1 3 Pull out the case downward arrow 2 avoid tilting when doing so 128 4 Push the case into the guides on the backs of the backrests 5 Carefully pull out the partition net and insert it in the front brackets as described in With normal cargo bay This is best carried out from the front seat To restore the original state proceed in the reverse order Finally lay the case in the two side brackets and then press forward until it engages The red warning indicator disappears in the recess when the catch is engaged Check whether the case Is properly locked in place by pulling it with a sudden movement Compartment in floor Automatic roll up cover the opened floor panel strikes against the roll up cover in the end posi tion If necessary unhook the roll up cover at the rear before opening the floor panel To open reach into the recess and swing up the handle The floor panel flap can be locked The partitions in the compartment can be rear ranged Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Folding up spare tire cover 1 Swing up the cover Cee 4 dE 2 Detach the hook from the bracket and hook into the floor panel flap Before swinging down return the hook to its Original position Storage area package Retaining straps You can unhook the rig
71. save the USB function on the pro grammable memory buttons To start audio playback refer to page 21 You can call up the tracks via the playback lists and information With USB devices you can also call up the tracks via the file directory Make your selection e g Playlists or Artists and press the controller ae AUX i SR Genres Artists 1001 Track 7 1 O07 Track 2 003 Track 3 004 Track 4 Select the track and press the controller You can display any information stored on the current track e g the name of the artist Press the controller during playback Select Details and press the controller i m AUK b 4 USR Fone lit Genres amp Repeat track _ 004 Tr ack i be The information for the current track are dis played Select the current track and press the con troller Select Repeat track and press the con troller 4 ALIX i LISE Vylists Genres P 004 Track 4 To stop repeating Press the controller Select Repeat track and press the con troller 189 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG USB audio interface Random play sequence You can play back the tracks of the selected list in random order e g all tracks of an artist 1 Select the current track and press the con troller 2 Select Random and press the controller End random playback 1 Press the controller 2 Select Random and pr
72. settings are stored for the remote control currently in use Changing tone settings 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the menu 3 Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller Vs Settings JA Display settings Steering wheel buttons vA Vehicle Tires 53 Language Units 2 Time Date 4 Select Audio and press the controller The tone settings can also be selected when you have opened Entertainment in the start menu Select Set and then Tone and press the controller Treble and bass 1 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Treble Bass is selected and press the controller Balance Fader Spe b p 3 fa ad S pur Lu Bass 169 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Move the controller to the left or right to select Treble or Bass Treble min Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected You can adjust the volume distribution in the same manner as Treble Bass Balance left right volume distribution Fader front rear volume distribution The speed dependent volume control increases the volume with increasing speed You can set various stages for the increase in volume Select Speed volume and press the con troller Ass Balance Fader Speed depencent v
73. the vehicle the phone book entries stored on the SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmit ted to your vehicle This transmission is depen dent on your mobile phone refer to the operat ing instructions of your mobile phone if necessary and can take several minutes If not all phone book entries are displayed gt Transfer all phone book entries from the SIM card to the mobile phone if necessary gt It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters Up to four mobile phones can be paired consec utively When you pair a fifth mobile phone the pairing data of the mobile phone for which the pairing data were stored first in the vehicle will be deleted Pe ae F i P C haPrlinn IF MAIFIMA IC LINCTIIPPACeTII VINCCAING IT Pairing Is UNSUCCESSI Ul gt Is the mobile phone supported by the mobile phone preparation package Infor mation on this subject is also provided on the Internet at www bmw com gt Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match The same Bluetooth passkey must be entered both on the mobile phone display and via iDrive gt Have you required longer than 30 seconds to enter the Bluetooth passkey gt Only a limited number of devices can be connected to the mobile phone Delete the connection to other devices if necessary gt The mobile phone no longer reacts Switch the mobile phone off and then on again or disconnect the power supply
74. the mobile phones cannot be oper ated via the vehicle iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button to open the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu Select Settings and press the controller Select Bluetooth and press the controller yo ee Change into the second field from the top select Phone and press the controller 6 Select the desired mobile phone With two drives gt Move the controller to the rear to change into the bottom field gt Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller With a single drive gt Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller FF Bluetooth i Phone Pair new phone Phones previously paired Mobile phone 2 198 7 Select Move device up and press the con troller ee ru i v Bluetooth 4 Fhone Delete device Mobile phone 1 Mobile phone 2 The selected mobile phone is moved upward by one position Unpairing mobile phone from vehicle If you no longer want to operate a mobile phone via the vehicle you can delete the pairing data of the mobile phone iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 Switch off the mobile phone 2 Press the MENU button to open the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu Rw Select Settings and press the controller Select Bluetooth and press the controller Bluetooth is selected 6 Change into the se
75. the sliding visor open together for as long as you hold the switch in this position gt Briefly press the switch back beyond the resistance point The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open automatically Briefly pressing the switch stops the motion In a similar manner the glass sunroof closes when you slide the switch forward The sliding visor remains open and can be closed by hand For information on using the convenient opera tion at the door lock or with the remote control refer to page 30 or 32 For information on comfort closing with comfort access refer to page 39 Opening and closing automatically Briefly press the switch beyond the resistance point The following movements are also automatic gt Press the switch with the sunroof open the sunroof is raised all the way 41 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG v i O Opening and closing gt When the sunroofis raised briefly press the switch in the opening direction the sunroof is opened all the way Briefly pressing the switch stops the motion Pinch protection system If the glass sunroof encounters resistance when closing from roughly the center of the roof opening or when closing from the raised posi tion the closing action is interrupted and the glass sunroof reopens a short way Despite the pinch protection system inspect the sunroof s travel path prior to closing it as the safety
76. the system will reduce your vehicle s speed to the same as that of the vehicle ahead to maintain your selected distance setting You can vary the following distance which will vary with speed Based on your selected distance setting the system automatically decreases the throttle setting and lightly applies the brakes if necessary In addition if the vehicle ahead of you slows to a complete stop the system can follow this action within the given scope and can also accelerate from a complete stop if the vehicle ahead of you drives off again shortly thereafter During braking your vehicle brake lamps will automatically illuminate to alert a fol lowing driver to take action In addition it may be necessary for your vehicle to downshift the automatic transmission to maintain the dis tance setting selected As soon as the road in front of you has no moving vehicles the system will accelerate to your desired speed This set speed is also maintained on downhill grades however the vehicle speed can drop below the set speed when driving uphill if the engine out put is not sufficient A Active cruise control cannot detect stop signs red lights or any object that is stopped or is blocking the road Active cruise control is not and must not be used as a collision avoidance warning system Since this active cruise control system is a new technology and operates differently from con ventional cruise control systems which you may be accustome
77. tions that match your entries t jl ELMIRA IP 3 PALMYRA 4 DANNEMORA p destination is suggested by the system 3 Select town city gt Select highlighted town city Yes Select other town city Not Select entry e g Entry 3 To reenter the town city gt Repeat Y NYY To enter the town city by spelling Spell The town city can also be selected from the list via iDrive Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller Destinations that sound the same which cannot be differentiated by the system are Summarized in a separate list and shown as a destination followed by three dots 148 Select this entry with Yest if necessary Then select the desired town city from this list 4 Entering street and house number The street is entered in the same way as the destination To enter the house number oft 1 House number _ 2 Say the house number Up to 4 digit house numbers can be entered Say the house number as individual numbers Starting destination guidance we Start guidance Destination guidance starts immediately Saving destination The destination is added to the destination list or can be stored in the address book we Add to destination list or _ Add to address book Map guided destination selection If you only know the location of the town city or street of the destination then you can enter the destination by using a map
78. trailer part of the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle Load POP h ifi TL Max Load men Cr lt Max Load RARER i lt Max Load The permissible load is the total of the weight of occupants and cargo luggage The greater the weight of occupants the less cargo luggage can be transported 137 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG N Q D gt m Things to remember when driving Stowing cargo gt Load heavy cargo as far forward and as low as possible placing it directly behind the rear backrest gt Cover sharp edges and corners gt For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is not occupied secure each safety belt in the opposite buckle gt Donotpile objects higher than the top edge of the backrest gt Sports Wagon Use the partition net to protect the occu pants refer to page 128 Make sure that objects cannot penetrate through the parti tion net Wrap sharp edged or pointed objects which could strike the rear window while driving 138 Securing cargo J ig iff iif j 7 gt Use the luggage net luggage straps or securing straps to hold down small and lightweight luggage and cargo gt Heavy duty cargo straps for securing larger and heavier objects are availabl
79. until the desired CD CD 1 6 is selected and press the controller T LD co CD2 CD3 10 er 2 At the end of the last track the next CD will be selected If the CD magazine has been newly filled play back begins with the lowest CD e g CD 1 track 1 The CD magazine s load status is indicated on the Control Display You can store a CD compartment of the CD changer on the programmable memory but tons To start the CD changer refer to page Press the EMA button for the corresponding direction repeatedly until you reach the desired track The CD will start play at the start of the track The track is displayed on the Control Display You can also change the track with buttons on the steering wheel refer to page 11 182 Select a track by turning the controller Select the directory if necessary and press the controller directory 2 Le directory 3 001 Track 1 002 Track 2 Select the track and press the controller S Root directory 4 002 Track 2 003 Track 3 004 Track 4 005 Track 5 To change the directory Select the directory and press the controller directory 4 001 Track 1 002 Track 2 003 Track 3 004 Track 4 005 Track 5 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG To exit from the menu Select Scan and press the controller 4 Select the arrow and press the controller You can also store a particular trac
80. using the door lock 32 Operating principle iDrive 17 Operation by voice for mobile phone 205 adjusting volume 206 canceling 205 commands 205 correcting phone number 206 dialing phone number 206 placing a call 206 redialing 207 voice phone book 206 Options 213 215 Orientation menu refer to Start menu 17 Output refer to Engine data 260 Outside air refer to AUC Automatic recirculated air control 116 Outside temperature display 78 changing unit of measure 88 in computer 88 Overview operating principle 17 radio control 168 screen display 20 P Panic mode 31 Panorama glass sunroof 42 moving manually 44 Park Distance Control PDC 89 Parked car operation 118 Parked car ventilation 118 Parked car ventilation 117 activating activation time 118 preselecting activation times 118 switching on and off directly 118 Parked car ventilation system LED 113 Parking vehicle 62 Parking aid refer to PDC Park Distance Control 89 Parking assistant refer to PDC Park Distance Control 89 Parking brake refer to Handbrake 63 Parking lamps 107 replacing bulbs 245 Partition net Sports Wagon 128 Parts and accessories 6 Passenger side exterior mirror tilting down 53 281 Oo cD fia Gen 9 ad Everything from A to Z Pathway lighting 108 Pathway lighting 108 PDC 90 PDC display on 90
81. volume and the air distribution can be set Switching automatic climate control on and off 1 Turn to the left to minimum air volume 2 After approx 1 second turn to the left again You switch on the system again by pressing any button of the automatic climate control Front ventilation 1 Knurled wheels to smoothly open and close vent outlets 2 Levers to change the vent outlet direction FN Do not drop any foreign objects into the vent outlets otherwise these could be catapulted outwards and lead to injuries lt Ventilation for cooling Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool air in your direction for instance if the interior has become too warm etc Draft free ventilation Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past you and is not directed straight at you Rear ventilation aie LL e mur e O 1 Knurled wheel to smoothly open and close vent outlets 2 Knurled wheel to adjust the temperature gt Turn toward blue colder gt Turn toward red warmer 3 Levers to change the vent outlet direction Microfilter activated charcoal filter The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air The activated charcoal filter provides additional protection by filtering gas eous pollutants from the outside air Your BMW center replaces this combined filter as a stan dard part of your scheduled maintenance Parked car ventilation The concept The park
82. yellow vehicle detected ahead Display also used for warnings please read all information on warnings 3 Selected distance to vehicle ahead The indicator lights up as soon as the sys tem is activated The bars roll the vehicle in front of you has driven off 4 Brief display of stored desired speed m If the display mph km h appears briefly the conditions necessary for oper ation may currently not be met lt Warning lamps The indicator 2 continuously flashes yellow The prerequisites for operating the system are no longer met e g as a result of ABS or DSC interven tions The system brakes until you actively take over The indicator 2 flashes red a sig nal sounds The system indicates that you must brake and or maneuver the vehicle yourself The system can not automatically restore the distance to the vehicle driving ahead However this display cannot relieve the driver of the responsibility for adjusting the desired speed and driving style to the traffic conditions Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Radar sensors 1 Long range sensor 2 Location of the short range sensors behind the bumper 3 Location of the short range sensors behind the bumper with the M sports package System limitations Heavy rain and also dirt snow or ice can limit the detection of vehicles ahead If needed clean the radar sensor under the front bumper as well as the bumper area cov
83. 0 lt at gt Turn signals 67 D High beams headlamp flasher 109 High beam assistant 109 P Roadside parking lamps 109 CHECK Check Control 83 BG Computer 79 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 7 Buttons on steering wheel 4 C VS ST Mobile phone 194 gt Press accepting and ending call starting dialing for selected phone number and redialing if no phone number is selected gt Press and hold redialing Volume Activating deactivating voice com mand system 23 Changing radio station 172 Selecting music track 182 Scrolling in phone book and in lists with stored phone numbers Individually programmable 54 Individually programmable 54 Leaving lane warning 105 8 Instrument cluster 12 WS ne 10 oan Evan Windshield wipers 68 Rain sensor 68 Sports Wagon rear window wiper 69 Starting stopping engine and switching ignition on off 61 11 Ignitionlock 61 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 _ 19 Horn entire surface ee Steering wheel heater 54 v O S D E lt Steering wheel adjustment 54 de Cruise control 69 Active cruise control 71 R Releasing hood 232 Opening luggage compartment lid S tailgate 33 35 Head Up Display 101 at BMW Night Vision 103 pm NS Parking lamp 107 Daytime running lamps 108 1 A a iTi Low beams 107 Welcome lamps 1
84. 0 02 Entertainment Operation of the radio CD and external audio devices as well as their tone settings are described in this chapter Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG On off and tone On off and tone The following audio sources have shared con 1 Entertainment sound output on off volume trols and setting options gt Press switch on off gt Professional radio or When the system is switched on the Business radio most recently selected radio station or gt CD player CD track is played gt CD changer gt Turn adjust volume 2 Drive for audio CDs C 3 Eject CD ontrols 4 EM Station scan track search The audio sources can be operated using gt Change radio station gt Buttons in the area of the CD player gt Select track for CD player and iDrive CD changer gt gt Buttons on steering wheel refer to page 11 5 Drive for navigation DVDs gt Programmable memory buttons refer to oe Operation via iDrive page 21 iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 Buttons in area of CD player 1 Press the MENU button The layout of the buttons can vary depending This opens the start menu on your vehicle s equipment 2 Move the controller backwards to open One drive Entertainment AM WB SAT CD AUX is aca Presets as 5 kedi Tm W 6 97 5 a s i 7kROQ Ny e 8 100 5 Two drives You have the following choices FM and AM radio recep
85. 07 Automatic headlamp control 107 Daytime running lamps 108 Welcome lamps 107 Adaptive Head Light 109 High beam assistant 109 A A G Instrument lighting 111 H ZD Fog lamps 111 11 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Q xX O Q Instrument cluster mh ON O oi Indicator lamps for turn signals SH ARS Us die SD 100 om G 1207 fic aa Eiki w 2140 274 Tu Wo 123 8 Speedometer Indicator and warning lamps 13 Displays for gt Active cruise control 74 gt Leaving lane warning 105 Tachometer 78 Energy Control 79 Display for gt Clock date 78 gt gt gt gt Indicator and warning lamps 83 Speed of cruise control 70 Outside temperature 78 Desired speed for active cruise control 74 12 ED Wwe a gt gt gt V V OV V gt ZNA 8 Display for Odometer and trip odometer 78 Computer 79 Date and remaining travel distance for service requirements 81 Automatic transmission with Steptronic 63 Sport automatic transmission 66 HDC Hill Descent Control 92 High beam assistant 109 A Check Control message present 83 9 Fuelgauge 79 10 Resetting trip odometer 78 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Indicator and warning lamps The concept The indicator and warning lamps can light up in different combinations and colors Some lamps ar
86. 160 km h adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the column Traveling speeds up to max 100 mph 160 km h to achieve optimum driving comfort These pressure specifications can be found on the door post when you open the driver s door The permissible top speed for these tire inflation pressures is 100 mph 160 km h Do not exceed this speed otherwise tire dam age and accidents may result 4 Tire inflation pressures for speeds above 100 mph 160 km h In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph 160 km h please observe and if necessary adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph 160 km h from the relevant table on the following pages Oth erwise tire damage and accidents could occur 4 Observe all national and local maximum speed limits otherwise violations of the law could occur Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 528i Tire size Compact wheel T 135 80 R17 102M All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi kilopascal with cold tires Cold ambient temperature 245 45 R17 95 W 245 45 R17 99 V M S XL 225 50 R 17 94 V M S 225 50 R 17 94 W 245 40 R 18 93 W 225 50 R 17 94 H M S 245 40 R 18 97 V M S XL Front 245 40 R 18 93 W Rear 275 35 R 18 95 W Front 245 35 R 19 93 Y XL Rear 275 30 R 19 96 Y XL More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 263 Press
87. 170 Speed with winter tires 230 Sport automatic transmission 66 Dynamic Driving Control 66 kick down 64 towing 256 with comfort access 39 Sport program Automatic transmission with Steptronic 64 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Sports Wagon automatic roll up cover 127 automatic tailgate operation 36 compartments in cargo bay 128 expanding cargo bay 127 opening rear window 34 opening tailgate 35 panorama glass sunroof 42 partition net 128 rear window wiper 69 rear window wiper changing wiper blade 243 releasing fuel filler door in event of electrical malfunction 220 roll up cover 127 roll up cover for cargo bay 127 self leveling suspension 94 socket in cargo bay 125 storage area package 129 tail lamps replacing bulbs 247 Stability control refer to Driving stability control systems 90 Star button 55 Star button 54 Start Stop button 61 starting the engine 62 switching off the engine 62 Start for stopwatch 86 Start guidance 147 156 Starting refer to Starting engine 62 Starting assistance refer to Jump starting 254 Starting assistant 93 Starting difficulties refer to Jump starting 254 Starting off on slopes refer to Starting assistant 93 Start menu iDrive 17 Start route guidance 149 Start service 210 with BMW Assist 213 State Provin
88. 225 50 R 17 94 H M S 245 40 R 18 93 W 245 40 R 18 97 V M S XL Front 245 40 R 18 93 W Rear 275 35 R 18 95 W More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 263 535xi Sports Wagon Tire size Compact wheel T 135 80 R17 102 M All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi kilopascal with cold tires Cold ambient temperature 225 50 R 17 94 W M S 225 50 R 17 94 W 245 45 R 17 95 W 225 50 R 17 94 H M S 245 45 R 17 99 V M S XL 245 40 R 18 93 Y 245 40 R 18 97 V M S XL More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 264 226 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Pressure specifications in psi kPa 61 420 Traveling speeds up to max of 100 mph 160 km h LEE EX lis AE Ti TEF 32 220 32 220 33 230 35 240 32 230 35 240 36 250 36 250 38 260 35 240 Traveling speeds including those exceeding AiAi 32 220 32 220 33 230 35 240 33 230 100 mph 160 km h Rint al Ei P E 33 230 35 240 42 290 36 250 38 260 45 310 36 250 38 260 45 310 38 260 38 260 45 310 33 230 38 260 42 290 Pressure specifications in psi kPa Traveling speeds up to max of 100 mph 160 km h RR O F 33 230 32 220 36 250 g gt 41 280 39 270 44 300 61 420 Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph 160 km h in 33 230 32 220 36 250 Te 41 280 38 260 4
89. 23 Automatic air distribution 114 air volume 114 cruise control 71 garage door opener 120 headlamp control 107 service notification 211 steering wheel adjustment 47 storing stations 174 tailgate operation 36 Automatic car washes 136 Automatic climate control 113 automatic air distribution 114 parked car ventilation 117 switching on and off 117 ventilation in rear 117 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Automatic closing of doors refer to Automatic soft closing 33 Automatic curb monitor 53 Automatic lighting refer to Automatic headlamp control 107 refer to Daytime running lamps 108 refer to Interior lamps 111 refer to Pathway lighting 108 refer to Welcome lamps 107 Automatic lights refer to High beam assistant 109 Automatic low beams refer to High beam assistant 109 Automatic programs 114 Automatic roll up cover Sports Wagon 127 Automatic soft closing 33 Automatic speed reduction for descents refer to HDC Hill Descent Control 92 Automatic station search 173 Automatic transmission with Steptronic 63 interlock 64 kick down 64 manually unlocking and locking transmission lock 65 shiftlock 64 towing 256 tow starting 257 with comfort access 39 Automatic ventilation 118 AUTO program for automatic climate control 114 Auto Request 211 Autostore on
90. 29 Weather news flashes 175 Website BMW 4 Weights 263 Welcome lamps 107 Welcome light 108 Wheel tire combination refer to New wheels and tires 229 Wheel tire damage 229 Wheelbase refer to Dimensions 261 Wheels and tires 222 Width refer to Dimensions 261 Windows 40 convenient operation 30 convenient operation from outside 32 convenient operation with comfort access 39 rear window Sports Wagon 34 safety switch 41 Windshield cleaning refer to Wiper system 68 defrosting refer to Defrosting windows 115 displays refer to Head Up Display 101 Windshield wash automatic refer to Rain sensor 68 capacities reservoir 264 filler neck for washer fluid 233 rear window 69 washer fluid 69 windshield washer nozzles 69 wiper system 68 Windshield wipers refer to Wiper system 68 wiper blade replacement 243 Winter tires 230 setting speed limit 85 storage 230 Wiper blade replacement 243 Wiper system 68 rain sensor 68 washer fluid 69 windshield washer nozzles 69 With highways in navigation 154 Word matching principle for navigation 155 Working in the engine compartment 232 Wrenches screwdrivers refer to Onboard toolkit 243 X xDrive 92 Xenon lamps 245 replacing bulbs 245 Y Your individual vehicle programmable buttons on steering wheel 54 settings refer to Personal Profil
91. 3 opening from inside 33 opening from inside Sports Wagon 35 opening from outside 34 opening from outside Sports Wagon 35 opening with remote control 31 Cargo bay cover refer to Roll up cover 127 Caring for the vehicle finish 240 Car key refer to Keys remote control 28 Car phone 194 installation location refer to Center armrest 122 refer to Mobile phone 194 refer to separate operating instructions Car radio refer to Radio 172 Car Shampoo 241 Car washes 62 136 239 with comfort access 39 Catalytic converter refer to Hot exhaust system 135 Categories 179 CBC Cornering Brake Control 90 CBS Condition Based Service 237 CD 168 181 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG CD changer 181 controls 168 fast forward reverse 185 installation location 185 random sequence 184 repeating a track 184 sampling tracks 183 selecting a CD 181 selecting a track 182 switching on off 168 tone control 169 volume 169 CD player 181 controls 168 fast forward reverse 185 random sequence 184 repeating a track 184 sampling a track 183 selecting a track 182 switching on off 168 tone control 169 volume 169 Center armrest front 122 rear 126 Center brake lamp 247 Center console 14 Central locking 30 Central locking from inside 32 fro
92. 4 300 hitito 38 260 35 240 41 280 re gt 45 310 42 290 48 330 550i Tire size Compact wheel T 135 80 R17 102M All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi kilopascal with cold tires Cold ambient temperature 245 40 R 18 93 Y 245 45 R17 95 W 245 45 R17 99 V M S XL 225 50 R 17 94 H M S 225 50 R 17 94 W 245 40 R 18 97 V M S XL Front 245 40 R 18 93 Y Rear 275 35 R 18 95 Y Front 245 35 R 19 93 Y XL Rear 275 30 R 19 96 Y XL Pressure specifications in psi kPa Traveling speeds up to max of 100 mph 160 km h 100 mph 160 km h By o MUN poi A1 ae at i T 32 220 38 260 32 220 35 240 33 230 41 280 32 220 38 260 32 220 38 260 38 260 45 310 33 230 39 270 33 230 39 270 39 270 46 320 32 220 35 240 32 220 32 220 33 230 38 260 35 240 39 270 33 230 38 260 38 260 45 310 61 420 Traveling speeds including those exceeding More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 263 Tire identification marks Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires Tire size e g 225 50 R 17 94 W Nominal width in mime Aspect ratio in Belted construction radial Rim diameter in inches Carrying capacity ID code not in ZR tires Speed code letter in ZR tires before the R Speed letter Q up to 100 mph 160 km h T up to 118 mph 190 km h H up to 131 mph 210 km h
93. 5 Warning 6 Call 202 213 Call accepting 200 displaying accepted 203 ending 201 in absence 203 rejecting 201 starting 201 Calling by entering phone number 201 from phone book 202 from Top 8 list 203 redialing 203 refer to telephone operating instructions Can holder refer to Cup holders 124 Capacities 264 Car battery refer to Vehicle battery 251 Car Data 80 Care 239 car care products 239 carpets 241 car washes 239 CD DVD player 242 chrome components 240 displays 241 exterior 239 fine wooden components 241 hand washing 240 headlamps 240 high pressure cleaning jets 239 interior 241 leather 241 light alloy wheels 240 paint 240 plastic components 241 rubber gaskets 240 safety belts 241 sensors and cameras 241 upholstery and cloth covered paneling 241 windows 240 wiper blades 240 Cargo refer to Cargo loading 137 securing 138 securing with ski bag 130 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Cargo bay capacity 263 emergency operation refer to Opening manually Sports Wagon 35 emergency release 34 expanding Sports Wagon 127 floor panel flap refer to Compartment in floor Sports Wagon 128 locking separately 34 opening closing refer to Luggage compartment lid tailgate 3
94. 50 km otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur lt 4 Average speed Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine switched off are not included in the calculations of average speed To reset average speed press BC button on turn signal lever for approx 2 seconds 79 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Everything under control Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated for the time during which the engine is running To reset average fuel consumption press BC button on turn signal lever for approx 2 sec onds For different routes You can display the average speed and average consumption for two different routes on the Control Display refer to the following and to Trip computer Displays on Control Display You can also call up the computer via iDrive For operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller to the right to open Navigation Without navigation system Open Car Data 3 Select Car Data and press the controller Addes bel lt A Onboard info INevigation 410 pm Arrival time 330 mis Range 279 mis Distance to dest 485 mpn 23 0 mpg Speed Lonsumpton 4 Select Onboard info and press the con troller i Car Data Trip computer Limit Arrival time Range Distance to dest Speed Consumption gt E
95. 510 Printed in Germany Printed on environmentally friendly paper bleached without chlorine suitable for recycling Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Contents The fastest way to find specific topics is to use the index refer to page 270 Using this Owner s Manual 4 Notes 7 Reporting safety defects At a glance 10 Cockpit 16 iDrive 23 Voice command system Controls 28 Opening and closing 45 Adjusting 56 Transporting children safely 61 Driving 78 Everything under control 89 Technology for comfort convenience and safety 107 Lamps 113 Climate 120 Practical interior accessories Driving tips 134 Things to remember when driving Navigation 142 Starting navigation system 144 Destination entry 156 Destination guidance 165 What to do if Entertainment 168 On off and tone 172 Radio 178 Satellite radio 181 CD player and CD changer 187 AUX In connection 188 USB audio interface Communications 194 Telephoning 209 BMW Assist Mobility 220 222 232 237 239 243 293 Refueling Wheels and tires Under the hood Maintenance Care Replacing components Giving and receiving assistance Reference 260 265 270 Technical data Short commands of voice command system Everything from A to Z Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Notes Notes Using this Owner s Manual We have made every effort to ensure that you are able
96. 6 6 230 6 500 200 270 2 50 535i xi 181 8 2 979 6 300 5 800 300 407 1 400 5 000 550i 292 8 4 799 8 360 6 300 360 488 3 400 Dimensions Sedan a 6 a oo P LE 79 9 2 030 72 7 1 846 ha 113 7 2 888 ee 1911 4 6854 All dimensions are given in inches mm Vehicle height with xDrive 58 3 in 1 482 mm Smallest turning circle diam 37 5 ft 11 4 m with xDrive 39 ft 11 9 m 261 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG S O Gen 3 ag Technical data Sports Wagon O T lt m o w 79 9 2 030 12 711 846 113 6 2 886 191 2 4 856 All dimensions given in inches mm Smallest turning circle diam 39 ft 11 9 m 262 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 78 7 2 000 Weights Sedan Curb weight gt Manual transmission gt Automatic transmission Approved gross vehicle weight gt Manual transmission gt Automatic transmission Load Approved front axle load Approved rear axle load Approved roof load capacity Cargo bay capacity los kg Ibs kg los kg los kg Ibs kg Ibs kg Ibs kg Ibs kg cu ft l Never exceed either the approved axle loads or the gross vehicle weight Sedan Curb weight gt Manual transmission gt Automatic transmission Approved gross vehicle weight gt Manual transmission gt Automatic transmission Loa
97. A Audio JA Display settings This stops the timer 2 Steering wheel buttons v Vehicle Tires v Language Units Select Interim time and press the controller The interim time appears below the ongoing primary stopwatch count Move the controller once to the front if nec All of the other functions remain available essary to change to the first field from the D even while the stopwatch is running The top stopwatch continues operation in the back ground lt 4 Ag Date Fi 10 2008 DOMN iDrive for operating principle refer to page Press the MENU button once or twice until the start menu appears Communication fr Climate Navigation Entertainment Press the controller to open the j menu 86 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 3 Turn the controller until Time is selected and press the controller Date 03 53 PM 12 hour Set time Time format Le Hour memo 4 Turn the controller until Set time is selected and press the controller TF Time EF hour Time format LC Hour memo 1 Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller 2 Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller The changed time is stored You will hear three tones just before the top of each hour Select Hour memo and press the controller LE The hour signal is activated The setting is stored for the remote control cur re
98. ARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY W Route preference Aictive Arrow display 163 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG The current position of your BMW is displayed WD AV Cf we dance Longitude 38 67 00 Latitude 67 68 00 N Altitude 1122 ft ion gui If the navigation system is unable to identify a town city your current map coordinates will appear To exit the menu 45 Select the arrow and press the controller Destinat You can also have the current position dis played on a map refer to page 158 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG What to do If What to do if gt anavigation DVD is inserted but an instruc tion to insert the DVD appears on the Con trol Display The navigation DVD may not be the correct DVD for the navigation system This infor mation is indicated on the DVD label gt you request the current position of your vehicle but do not receive a precise dis play The system is unable to receive enough GPS signals at your current position due to obstructions your position is not yet avail able on your navigation DVD or the system is in the process of calculating your posi tion Reception is best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky gt the destination guidance does not accept a destination The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded Sele
99. Also vehicles traveling in a staggered manner on a highway may cause a delay in the system s reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause the system to react to a vehicle that is actually in the lane next to yours Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if necessary In addition the system is interrupted whenever the driver applies the vehicle brakes shifts the transmission from drive D to neutral N or deactivates DSC After any inter ruption the system will no longer automatically activate the vehicle brakes which means the driver must intervene and resume manual brak ing You should then reactivate the system only when you are fully aware of the prior speed and distance settings lt 4 Active cruise control may brake when you reduce the stored desired speed however the driver must constantly monitor traffic and inter vene if necessary When you switch off the engine or ignition active cruise control is fully switched off too and any settings you have selected are can celed 76 Unexpected lane change If a vehicle in front of you is behind a stopped vehicle and unexpectedly changes lanes you must react yourself as the system does not react to stopped vehicles Swerving vehicles When a vehicle swerves out of adjacent lanes into your lane the system does not detect the vehicle until it is completely in your lane When a vehicle ahead suddenly swerves into your lane the system ma
100. Antilock Brake System 90 airbags 99 driving stability control systems 90 safety belts 50 Safety tires refer to Run flat tires 229 Satellite radio 178 enabling channel 178 selecting channel 179 storing channel 179 SAT in radio mode 168 178 Save current destination 153 Scan music tracks on CD 183 stations in radio mode 173 283 Oo cD fea O Gen 3 ad Everything from A to Z Scan CD changer 183 CD player 183 radio 173 Scan all in audio mode 183 Scan directory in audio mode 183 Screen refer to iDrive 16 Screw thread for tow fitting 256 SDARS refer to Satellite radio 178 Seat heater distribution 51 Seats 46 active backrest width adjustment 47 adjusting the seats 46 comfort seat 46 easy entry exit 47 heating 51 lumbar support 47 memory refer to Seat mirror and steering wheel memory 47 shoulder support 46 sitting safely 45 storing the setting 47 thigh support 46 ventilation refer to Active seat ventilation 52 Securing load refer to Securing cargo 138 with ski bag refer to Securing cargo 130 Select as destination 150 213 Select current speed 85 Selecting audio sources refer to Operation via iDrive 168 Selecting distance with active cruise control 73 Selecting frequency manually 173 Selecting menu items 19 Selecting route 154 Selec
101. BMW Assist or while a call to BMW Assist is already in progress If this happens you must log off the Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG mobile phone from the vehicle if you wish to place a call with the mobile phone Drive for operating principle refer to page 16 3 Press the MENU button to open the start menu Commissioning Communication Pairing mobile phone in vehicle The following prerequisites must be met gt Suitable mobile phone the mobile phone is supported by the full mobile phone prepara tion package Information on this subject is also provided on the Internet at www bmw com Climate Navigation gt The mobile phone is ready to operate 4 Press the controller to open the menu gt The Bluetooth link on the vehicle refer to page 199 and on the mobile phone is active 5 Select Settings and press the controller Info sources Display ol gt Depending onthe mobile phone the mobile phone may need presetting e g using the following menu items gt Bluetooth activated gt Connection not with confirmation Audio Display settings Steering wheel buttons Vehicle Tires Language Units Time Date gt Reconnect gt Depending on the mobile phone model the setting energy saving mode can for exam ple result in vehicle failing to detect the paired mobile phone 6 Select Bluetooth and press the controller
102. Display 152 l aP Address book MD OP RST W ADAM DR TOM JULIA OFFICE PETER Select the entry and press the controller To start the destination guidance Select Start guidance and press the control ler Address book i P RST W Z A D J Edit address Delete address JULIA PETER Select Address book and press the con troller Select the entry and press the controller Select Edit address and press the con troller i g Address book A D J P RST W 2 Start guidance i Delete address JULIA PETER Change entry For operation refer to Entering a destina tion manually page 1 Select Store in address book and press the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Deleting individual destinations from address book 1 Select Address book and press the con troller 2 Select the entry and press the controller 3 Select Delete address and press the con troller gf Address book A D JP RST W Z Start guidance Edit address JULIA 4 Select Yes and press the controller Deleting all destinations from address book 1 Open the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Delete data is selected and press the
103. Display The driving stability control systems have failed Conventional braking effi ciency remains available without limita tions While you may continue you should remember to proceed cau tiously and drive defensively while avoiding full brake applications The Tire Pressure Monitor or the Flat Tire Monitor is also malfunctioning Have the system checked as soon as possible SRI Display of the previously described malfunction in Canadian models iS 5 m er DES The DSC indicator lamp lights up A message appears on the Control Dis play A malfunction has occurred in the DSC and DTC The stabilizing actions are no longer available The vehicle remains opera tional Have the system checked as soon as possible The brake system warning lamp lights d up yellow A message appears on the Control Display The brake assistant is defective Have the system checked as soon as possible Display of the previously described w malfunction in Canadian models Starting assistant The starting assistant enables you to start off conveniently on slopes The handbrake is not required for this purpose 1 Hold the vehicle with the brake 2 Release the brake and begin to drive imme diately ha i O The starting assistant holds the vehicle for approx 2 seconds after the brake is released After releasing the brake begin to drive immediately otherwise the starting assis tan
104. Displaying stored Check Control messages 1 Press the button longer The first stored message is displayed 2 Press the button When the button is pressed again a differ ent message Is displayed Displaying additional information later iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 84 3 Turn the controller until Info sources is selected and press the controller MDrive Settings b lt gt Trafic Info Travel Into Service Info 4 Turn the controller until Service Info is selected and press the controller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Check Control messages is selected and press the controller i Lighting system Stop vehicle Washer fluid level low Engine oil level below minimum 6 Select a text message and press the con troller ww Washer fluid Insufficient washer fluid in fluid reservoir Refill as soon as possible refer to Owner s Manual To exit the display 4 Select the arrow and press the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Indication of malfunction urgency Lighting system Stop vehicle BM Washer fluid level low LA Engine oil level below minimum Depending on your vehicle s equipment the stored Check Control messages are also dis played with the following symbols
105. Drive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until TPM is selected and press the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG PDC Delete dem i a Door locks Reset Un Status TPM active 6 Start the engine but do not start driving 7 Select Reset and press the controller 8 Select Yes and press the controller Status TPM active 9 Start to drive The tires are shown in gray and Resetting TPM is displayed After a few minutes of driving the set tire infla tion pressures in the tires are applied as the set values to be monitored Resetting finishes dur ing driving The tires are shown in green on the Control Display D If a flat tire is detected during resetting and applying the tire inflation pressures all tires are shown in yellow on the Control Dis play The message Tire low is displayed 4 Message with low tire inflation pressure The warning lamp lights up yellow A 1 message appears on the Control Dis play In addition an acoustic signal sounds There is a flat tire or extensive inflation pressure loss 1 Reduce speed and stop the vehicle care fully Avoid sudden
106. E CT 7 Categories i ROCK Jazz Country Latin mele CH 001 Channel A 7 CH 003 Channel C CH 004 Channel D CH 005 Channel E Channels or categories appear in the Con Press thecontroller EOD eave Other menu items are displayed Sele Ea men NENN Select Details and press the controller Presets Up to twelve channels you have stored previously All channels All channels are displayed no channel A Categories hannel B QUE nannel C All channels sorted by categories e g Tone lit hannel D news jazz ESN A SAT gt Allchannels Presets _ cnannel E The name of the channel and additional infor Rock mation on the current track are displayed e g Jazz the name of the artist Country Latin Pop Jazz gt Channel B Press the controller Elton John If Categories has been selected Rocket Man Select the desired category and press the controller lt a SAT Categories 1 Artist 2 Track 179 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Satellite radio Storing channel Notes 1 Select desired channel If no signal can be received for more than 4 sec 2 Press the controller onds a message is displayed on the Control Other menu items are displayed Display 3 Select Store and press the controller Reception may not be possible for certain reasons e g environmental influences or iJ topographical conditions
107. ER UNINC SAN BERNARDINO COU BAKERSFIELD BALDWIN PARK D p VWXYZ 012345677 9AOU Delete individual numbers or letters Town City Move the controller toward the right to select and press the controller Delete all numbers or letters Move the controller toward the right to select and press and hold the con troller 145 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Destination entry gt Enter a blank space Select the _ symbol and press the con troller gt Delete individual numbers or letters Move the controller toward the right to select and press the controller gt Delete all numbers or letters Move the controller toward the right to select 4m j and press and hold the con troller 3 Select the zip code and press the controller The corresponding destination is displayed 4 Change into the third field from the top Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller Entering street house number and intersection After the street you can also enter the intersec tion or the house number Entering street and intersection 1 Select Street or the displayed street and press the controller 2 Enter the street The street is entered exactly like the desti nation BC L R STV W 2 ABINGTON DR ACRES DR GREEN ALANDA PL ALDBURY CT ALDEN DR The intersection is entered in the same way as the street Entering a stree
108. Indicator lamp for Canadian models Applying The lever locks in position automatically Releasing Pull slightly upwards press the button and lower the lever If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to apply the handbrake while the vehicle is in motion do not pull it too firmly In doing so continuously press the but ton of the handbrake lever Otherwise too firm an application of the handbrake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the rear of the car to swerve 4 gt To prevent corrosion and one sided brak ing action occasionally apply the hand brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable The brake lamps do not light up when the hand brake is applied Manual transmission ha ES O While shifting in the 5th 6th gear lane press the gearshift lever toward the right otherwise accidental shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could result in engine damage lt 4 Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary When pressing the gearshift lever to the left overcome some resistance Automatic transmission with Steptronic In addition to fully automatic operation you can also manually shift with the Steptronic refer to page 64 Transmission positions PRNDMIS Displays in instrument cluster P RND DS S1 to S6 M1 to M6 The transmission position is indicated and in the manual mode the gear curren
109. LED in the button lights up and SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster Deactivating system gt Press the SPORT button again gt Engage reverse gear gt Switch off engine The LED in the button and SPORT in the instru ment cluster go out Turn signals headlamp flasher 1 High beams 2 Headlamp flasher 3 Turn signals Using turn signals Press the lever beyond the resistance point To turn off manually press the lever to the resistance point gt Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb needs to be replaced 4 Signaling briefly Press lever to resistance point and hold for as long as you wish to signal Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point the turn signal flashes three times ir e L mur e O You can activate or deactivate this function iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the menu Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Lighting is selected and press the controller O Triple turn signal O Daytime running lamps Pathway lighting 2405 O High beam assistant O Welcome light 6 Select Triple turn signal and press the controller R Triple turn signaling is activate
110. MW Night Vision 104 To deactivate BMW Night Vision 104 To display settings for BMW Night Vision 104 268 Command Seat heater distributiont Vent settings lt Automatic programs Parked car operation Automatic ventilationt Activation timet Command Settings menus Display off Info sources lt Settings Door locks lt Steering wheel buttons Lighting Service requirements lt Service lt BMW service settings gt Check Control messages Head up display Brightness lt Units lt Language Time Date PDC FTM TPM Bluetooth HDC lt Night Vision ont Night Vision off Night Vision settings Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG ooue 6 ely 01 U04 sdi Bulang uoljeBiaAenN JUBWUIeVI9 UQ SuUOIeDIUNWIWIO4D AUTO EA 269 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Everything from A to Z Everything from Ato Z Index a Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions and indicates where to find them in the text A ABS Antilock Brake System 90 indicator lamp 93 ACC refer to Active cruise control 71 Accepted calls 202 Accessories 6 Accident refer to Emergency request 253 Acoustic signal refer to Check Control 83 Activated charcoal filter for automatic climate control 117 Activation time for parked car ventilation 118 Active cruise control 71 indicator l
111. N repair operations on your vehicle without the required professional technical training If you do not know what repair procedures to follow have work on your vehicle done only by your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor respondingly trained personnel If this work is not carried out properly there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety haz ards 4 Hood Releasing a 1 if i I 2 Pull lever Opening Press the release handle and open the hood Do not open the hood until the engine has cooled down 232 Closing re m Close the hood from a height of approx 16 in 40 cm with momentum It must be clearly heard to engage Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear otherwise injuries may result If you see any signs that the hood is not com pletely closed while driving your vehicle you should stop at once and close it securely 4 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Engine compartment 2 1 Filler spout for engine oil refer to Adding engine oil 2 Starting aid terminal refer to page 254 3 Filler neck for washer fluid of the headlamp and windshield cleaning systems refer to page 69 4 Expansion tank for coolant refer to page 235 gt z O 233 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Under the hood Engine oil The engine oil consumption is depen
112. Odometer and trip odometer 3 Press button gt with ignition switched on trip odometer is reset gt with ignition switched off time outside temperature and odometer are briefly displayed From radio readiness the outside temperature and the time are displayed Date retrieval Press CHECK button on turn signal lever refer to page 84 Time and date setting refer to page 86 You can set the unit of measure F or C on the Control Display refer to Units of measure on page 88 Outside temperature warning If the display drops to 37 F 3 C a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up A mes sage appears on the Control Display There is an increased danger of ice Even at temperatures above 37 F 3 3 C ice can form Therefore drive care fully e g on bridges and sections of road in the shade otherwise there is an increased accident risk 4 78 Tachometer Avoid engine speeds in the white striped advance warning field arrow 1 if possible Be sure to avoid engine speeds in the red warn ing field arrow 2 At high revs in this range the flow of fuel is interrupted to protect the engine Coolant temperature Should the coolant and with it the engine become too hot a warning lamp lights up In addition a message appears on the Control Display Checking coolant level refer to page 235 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Energy Control Displa
113. Other menu items are displayed The current track on the CD is repeated To stop repeating 1 Press the controller again 2 Select Repeat and press the controller Compressed audio files 1 Select the current track and press the con troller 2 Select the desired menu item gt To repeat the selected track select Repeat track and press the controller gt To repeat all tracks of the current direc tory select Repeat directory and press the controller Directory 4 Random all Repeat track O Details 005 Track 5 _ To stop repeating 1 Press the controller 2 Select Repeat track or Repeat directory and press the controller Random play sequence In this mode the tracks on the current CD are played once in a random sequence 1 Select Set and press the controller Other menu items are displayed 2 Select Random and press the controller To stop random function 1 Press the controller 2 Select Random and press the controller Compressed audio files 1 Select the current track and press the con troller 2 Select the desired menu item gt To play all tracks of the current directory in random order select Random direc tory and press the controller gt To play all tracks of the CD in random order select Random all and press the controller To stop random function 1 Press the controller 2 Select Random directory or Random all and press th
114. Owner s Manual lh for Vehicle The Ultimate Driving Machine Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 5281 Owner s Manual for Vehicle 5351 Congratulations and thank you for choosing a BMW 550i Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with enhanced control and security when you drive it We therefore 528xi have this request 535xi Please take the time to read this Owner s Manual and familiarize yourself with the information that we have compiled for you before starting off in your new vehicle It contains important data and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW s unique range of technical fea tures The manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service life This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models We wish you an enjoyable driving experience BMW AG BMW recommends Castrol Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 2008 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich Germany Reprinting including excerpts only with the written consent of BMW AG Munich Order No 01 41 2 600 310 US English 11 08 08 03
115. P21W 1 Turn signal 2 Brake lamp 3 Taillamp 4 Backup lamp 5 Brakelamp 6 Reflector 7 Side marker lamp Center brake lamp This lamp uses LED technology for operation In the event of a malfunction please go to your BMW center or a workshop that works accord ing to BMW repair procedures with correspond ingly trained personnel Fender mounted lamps Sedan The illustration shows the left hand side of the cargo bay All the bulbs are integrated into a central bulb fitting 1 Lift up floor mat 2 Undo the quick release fasteners of the side panel and pull out the panel Turn the lock to the left and remove the bulb holder Backup lamps Remove and replace the bulb Other lamps Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replace ment Sports Wagon Ts Right side unhook the retaining strap refer to page 129 Open the side panel Turn the bulb socket to the left and remove Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replace ment 247 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Replacing components Lamps in luggage compartment lid License plate lamp 5 watt bulb CSW 1 Insert screwdriver into the slot and press to the right refer to arrows This releases the lamp Sa A Ta 2 Remove the lamp and replace the bulb Sports Wagon Brake lamp and backup lamp 1 Tu
116. Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG iDrive Entertainment In the Entertainment menu the sound source currently heard e g a radio station is stored regardless of the selection on the Control Dis play 1 Select the desired function e g radio sta tion or CD 2 Press the W button longer than 2 seconds If the vehicle is equipped with two drives _ the current track is stored for CDs with compressed audio files lt Running function Press the Gigi button When selecting a phone number the connec tion is also established or the destination guid ance is started when a navigation destination is selected Displaying button assignment You can display the assignment of the buttons by touching them with your finger Please do not wear gloves when doing so Touching with an object e g a pen does not function Displaying short info Touch the Gigi button The assignment of the buttons is displayed Communication Climate Entertainment 5 SP Aitado se Destination of navigation system 2 Entertainment source Telephone phone number Not assigned 22 Displaying detailed information Touch the W button longer Deleting button assignments 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 Select P
117. Random CD changer 184 CD player 184 Side airbags 99 Side marker lamps replacing bulbs 246 Side mounted turn signals replacing bulbs 246 Side window blinds refer to Sun blinds 121 Signal horn refer to Horn 10 Sitting safely 45 with airbags 45 with head restraint 45 with safety belts 45 Ski bag 129 Sliding tilt sunroof refer to Glass sunroof electric 41 refer to Panorama glass sunroof 42 Slope assistant refer to Starting assistant 93 Snap in adapter mounting removing 207 using 194 Snow chains 231 Socket for Onboard Diagnostics interface 238 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Socket for remote control refer to Ignition lock 61 Sockets refer to Connecting electrical devices 125 Soft closure aid refer to Automatic soft closing 33 Song search on CD refer to Sampling tracks 183 SOS refer to Initiating an emergency request 253 Sound distribution in audio mode front rear fader 170 right left balance 170 Spare adapter for spare key 28 fuses 252 key 28 wheel refer to Compact wheel 250 Spare wheel refer to Changing wheels 248 Special oils refer to Approved engine oils 235 Specified oil grades refer to Approved engine oils 235 Speed limit 85 with compact wheel 251 Speed dependent volume 170 Speed limit warning refer to Speed limit 85 Speedometer 12 Speed volume tone control
118. The data on the service status of your vehicle or on required inspections are transmitted auto matically prior to the due date You can check when the BMW center was notified Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu Select Info sources and press the control ler Settings Display ol Trafic Info Travel Into Service Info Select Service Info and press the control ler Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Service requirements is selected and press the controller Check Coil b Auto Request Data exchange completed 10 21 08 4 10 pm Select Auto Request and press the con troller i aa Service requirements Service Request P 4 level Data exchange completed 10 7 1 08 04 10 pm You can transmit data regarding your vehicle s service status to your BMW center when you wish to arrange a service appointment Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Move the controller forward to select Communication Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until BMW Assist is selected and press the controller Phone Service Request Start service REXFORD DRIVE BEVERLY HILLS CA Select Service Request and press the controller Wg BMW Assist i Customer Relations gt Start service REXFORD DRIVE BEVERLY HILLS CA Select Start service and press the con trolle
119. The initialization finishes during driving which can be interrupted at any time When driving resumes the initialization is con tinued automatically Do not initialize the sys tem when driving with snow chains or com pact wheel 4 iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu v d Audio JI Display settings Steering wheel buttons VS Vehicle Tires Language Units AS Time Date 3 Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until F TM is selected and press the controller 4 Door locks 1 Correctly adjust pressure in all tires also after a tire change 2 Select Reset only while stopped with ignition on or engine running Reset Status active 6 Start the engine but do not start driving 7 Select Reset and press the controller 8 Select Yes and press the controller ie FIM No Reset active status 9 Start to drive resetting FIM is displayed The initialization finishes during driving Indication of a flat tire The warning lamp lights up red A mes sage appears on the Control Display In addition an acoustic signal sounds There is
120. Tires D 42 Language Units 2 2 Time Date Mak Traffic info settings Data exchange active Activation takes a few minutes The status is displayed on the Control Display If you open another menu the activation process continues to run in the background Bluetooth Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Profile is selected and press the controller Enabled TeleServices With BMW Assist activated you can have the Telematics ID displayed The Telematics ID is used to identify your vehicle These data are transmitted to the service Press the MENU button This opens the start menu felematics IO Communication Climate Navigation h Entertainment Press the controller to open the j menu Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller Info sources Display o gt lt vad Audio FI Di splay settings ap Steerin g wheel buttons 3 Vel icle T tf 5 a Language f Units WS Time Date 216 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG ooue 6 ely 01 U04 sdi Bulang uorjeBiaeN IUOUMMEMISURR SUOEIIUNLULUOT 217 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Refueling Refueling tank and a message is displayed lt FN When handli
121. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove 2 Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replace ment 246 Side mounted turn signals 5 watt bulb W5W 1 Press back against the front edge of the lamp with the tip of your finger then pivot it out SID 2 Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove 3 Remove the bulb for replacement Side marker lamps front and rear To replace please go to your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per sonnel Taillamps Sedan gt Turn signals 1 tail lamps 6 and side marker lamps 7 are designed using LED technol ogy In the event of a malfunction please go to your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel gt Backup lamps 16 watt bulb W16W gt Other lamps 21 watt bulb P21W Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 1 Turn signal 2 Tail lamp and brake lamp 3 Backup lamp 4 Brake lamp 5 Reflector 6 Tail lamp 7 Side marker lamp Sports Wagon gt Turn signals 1 tail lamps 3 and side marker lamps 7 are designed using LED technol ogy In the event of a malfunction please go to your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel gt Backup lamps 16 watt bulb W16W gt Brake lamps 21 watt bulb
122. WNYC or Choose station FM presets or AM presets lt Preset lt e g Preset 1 lt FM manual AM manual or Choose frequency Frequency Megahertz AM Autostoret gt Weatherband menu gt Weatherband on gt Choose weatherband stationt SAT radio menus SAT radio lt SAT radio presets SAT radio all channelst SAT radio categories CD menus CD CD changer menu CD changer CD 1 6 lt CD track lt CD 1 6 track gt Audio AUX 267 S Lu O Gen 3 ad Short commands of voice command system Climate Function To adjust temperature distribution for front seat heating 51 To open Vent settings 115 To open Automatic programs 114 To open Parked car ventilation 118 To open Automatic ventilation 118 To display activation times 118 1 menu Function To open the menu Display off 21 To open Info sources To open Settings To open Door locks 30 32 To open Steering wheel buttons 54 To open Lighting 67 To open Service requirements 81 211 To open Service 81 211 To open BMW Service settings settings 214 To display Check Control messages 84 To open Head Up Display 101 To set brightness of Control Display 87 To open Units 88 To open Language 88 142 To open Time 86 To open Date 87 To open PDC 89 To open FTM 94 To open TPM 96 To display Bluetooth 198 To open HDC 92 To activate B
123. You can request more detailed information on every entry Select State inspection and press the controller Select the entry and press the controller iama Service requirements Status 10 2009 4 Rear brake pads aad 100 mis Vehicle check Rear brake pads Service overdue Please make an appointment with your BMW center soon 8 M ore Brake fluid E E Front EE rs Select Set service date and press the controller The month is selected To exit from the menu 45 Select the arrow and press the controller 82 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 9 Turn the controller to make the adjustment 2009 ee State inspection Next state safety inspection see above date Set service date 10 Press the controller to apply the setting The year is selected 11 Turn the controller to make the adjustment 12 Press the controller to apply the setting The date entry Is stored To exit the menu 45 Select the arrow and press the controller Check Control The concept The Check Control monitors functions in the vehicle and issues a message if there is a mal function in the monitored systems This kind of Check Control message consists of indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and if necessary an acoustic signal and text messages at the bottom of the Control Display Indicator and warning lamps The indicator and warning l
124. Z Adam Dr Tom Julia Office 2 Select A Z and press the controller 3 To limit the number of displayed entries select the first letter of the desired entry and press the controller 4 Select the desired entry and press the con troller 4 Phone 1A A Da JO RST WW Z Dr Tom Julla Office 5 Select Call and press the controller The system dials the number If different phone numbers are stored in the mobile phone under one name e g office and home the name is shown once for each phone number You can change a phone number stored in the phone book e g to call a specific extension 1 Select Phone and press the controller 2 Select A Z and press the controller 3 Select the desired entry and press the con troller 4 Select Add digits and press the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Change the phone number Select Dial number and press the control ler To select an entry and establish a connection Select Phone and press the controller Select list and press the controller Top 8 Redial Missed calls Received calls Phone i Dial A D 1 0 RST WZ Adam Dr Tom Julia Office Select the desired entry and press the con troller 1 Phone i Top 8 Select Call and press the controller The system dials the number Select the desired entry from the list and press the controller S
125. a flat tire or extensive inflation pressure loss 1 Reduce speed and stop the vehicle care fully Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers 2 Identify damaged tire gt If identification is not possible con tact a BMW center 4 3 Replace the damaged wheel refer to Changing wheels on page 248 PDC Delete di b 1 Run flat tires 1 Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph 80 km h Avoid severe braking and steering maneuvers and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h A If the vehicle is not equipped with run flat tires refer to page 229 do not continue driving Continuing to drive with a flat tire could cause severe accidents 4 ir e L mur e O 2 Atthe next opportunity check the air pres sure in all four tires gt If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized The system must then be initialized lt 3 Inthe event of complete tire pressure loss O psi O kPa you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guide values gt With alight load 1 to 2 persons without luggage approx 155 miles 250 km gt With a medium load 2 persons cargo bay full or 4 persons without luggage approx 94 miles 150 km gt With a full load 4 or more persons cargo bay full approx 30 miles 50 km A Drive cautiously and do not exceed 50 mph 80 km h or else you run the ri
126. ack 4 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG What you will need To avoid rattling noises later on note the posi tions of the tools before removing them then return them to their initial positions after com pleting work 1 Chock 2 Vehicle jack 3 Lug wrench The tools are located in the mount under the floor mat or floor panel flap 1 Lift up floor mat or floor panel flap and cover located beneath it 2 Take out the required tools After using the tools return them to the storage space gt With run flat tires no tools are provided for wheel changes They can be pur chased as accessories at your BMW center 4 Sports Wagon removing and installing floor panel flap of storage area package 1 Unhook the roll up cover at the rear 2 Raise the floor panel flap 3 Unhook the two catch straps at the top P Unlock the gas spring strut refer to arrow and remove 5 Fold over the floor panel flap toward the front to release it and remove Open the front floor panel flap N D Swing up the spare tire cover and hook the hooks into the upper frame of the tailgate opening Take out the cross support upward When installing the floor panel flap proceed in the reverse order and press down the hinge covers 249 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Replacing components Compact wheel eS Unscrew th
127. ad type and the kind and length of the traffic obstruction the route can also be calculated so that it passes through the traffic obstruction gt Avoid tollroads Tollroads are avoided where possible gt Avoid ferries Ferries are avoided where possible To exit the menu 45 Select the arrow and press the controller The route criteria can also be changed in the arrow or map view 1 Select the symbol for the route criterion and press the controller 2 Select a route criterion and press the con troller If the route criteria Avoid highways Avoid tollroads or Avoid ferries are selected the calculation time for the route can increase considerably 4 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Word matching principle The system supports the word matching princi ple to make it easier for you to enter the names of streets or towns The system runs ongoing checks comparing your destination entries with the data stored on the navigation DVD as the basis for instant response The user bene fits include gt Names of specific locations can also vary from the official versions if you are using a spelling that is customary in another coun try Example Instead of Munchen you can also enter the English spelling Munich or the Italian spelling Monaco gt When you are entering the names of towns and streets the system will complete them as soon as enough letters are available to ens
128. age position P of the auto matic transmission and apply the handbrake Otherwise the vehicle can roll If a detected vehicle in front of you brakes to a complete stop and your vehicle has also been braked to a complete stop by the system gt If the vehicle in front of you drives off while the marking 1 for the desired speed in the speedometer is green your vehicle will accelerate without you having to do any thing gt If the vehicle in front of you drives off while the marking 1 is orange you briefly depress the accelerator pedal or press button 4 Rolling bars in the distance indicator 3 mean that the vehicle in front of you has driven off If you are stopped behind a vehicle with the brake pedal depressed and the system is inter rupted or deactivated 1 Press button 4 to activate a stored desired speed or select a desired speed with the lever arrow 1 or arrow 2 2 Release the brake pedal If the vehicle in front of you drives off briefly depress the accelerator pedal or press button 4 Deactivating system gt Press the lever upward or downward twice while driving gt When stopped do the same with the brake pedal depressed gt Switch off the ignition The displays turn off and the stored desired speed and distance are deleted 74 Displays in instrument cluster i 1 Stored desired speed gt Green the system is active gt Orange the system is interrupted 2 Lights up
129. ailgate 33 35 18 Controller 16 Turn press or move horizontally in four directions 19 Opening start menu on Control Display 17 15 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG iDrive iDrive iDrive combines the functions of a large number navigation The control of the individual func of switches This allows these functions to be tions is described in connection with the rele operated from a central position The following vant equipment section provides an introduction to basic menu Controls LI 1 LA d 7 J A T E af IE ZY a A 2 4 Le RO r i i 1 Control Display 2 MENU button Opening start menu 3 Controller With the controller you can select menu items and make settings gt move in four directions arrows 4 gt turn arrow 5 gt press arrow 6 To avoid posing an unnecessary hazard due to inattention both to your own vehi cle s occupants and to other road users never attempt to use the controls or make entries unless traffic and road conditions allow 16 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Menu overview Communication gt Telephone gt BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices Navigation or onboard information gt Navigation system gt Onboard information e g for displaying the average fuel consumption Entertainment gt Radio CD player and CD changer
130. air volume and air y distribution to the windshield and c 4 side windows in the direction of the upper body and in the footwell It also adapts your instructions for the tempera ture to outside influences throughout the year The cooling function is switched on along with the AUTO program At the same time a con densation sensor controls the program in such a way that window condensation is prevented as much as possible Intensity of AUTO program You can adjust the intensity of the AUTO pro gram by repeatedly pressing the AUTO button The respective current setting is briefly dis played on the Control Display when the button IS pressed You can also adjust the intensity of the AUTO program via iDrive iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller to the left to open Cli mate 114 3 Select Automatic programs and press the controller O soft Cl medium 4 Select the desired intensity and press the controller R The marked intensity of the automatic program is switched on Temperature icy Set the desired temperature indi vidually on the driver s and front p passenger side The automatic climate control adjusts this temperature as quickly as possible at any time of year if necessary with the maxi mum cooling or heating capacity and then keeps it constant gt When changing between diff
131. al locking system locks again after a short time if no door has been opened gt Lock after driving The central locking system locks the vehicle as soon as you start to drive 8 Press the controller M The setting is selected The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Unlocking and opening gt Either unlock the doors together with the button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or gt pull on the door handle of each door twice the first time unlocks the door the second time opens it Locking gt Use the central locking button to lock all of the doors simultaneously or gt press down the lock button of a door To prevent you from being locked out the open driver s door cannot be locked using the lock button Persons or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the inside Always take along the remote control when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside 4 Doors ir e mur e O Automatic soft closing To close the doors merely push them gently The closing process will then be carried out automatically Make sure that the closing path of the doors is clear otherwise injuries may result lt Luggage compartment lid tailgate gt During opening the luggage compart mentlid tailgate pivots back and up Make sure that adequate clearanc
132. alarms 38 refer to Switching off alarm 37 Fastening safety belts refer to Safety belts 50 warning lamp 50 Fastest route for navigation 154 Fast route in navigation 154 Filler neck for washer fluid 69 Filter refer to Microfilter activated charcoal filter 117 First aid refer to First aid kit 254 First aid kit 254 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Flashing during locking unlocking refer to Setting confirmation signals 31 triple turn signal activation 67 Flashlight 122 Flat tire changing wheels 248 compact wheel 250 Flat Tire Monitor 94 95 refer to Tire condition 229 run flat tires 95 97 229 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 96 warning lamp 95 97 Flat Tire Monitor 94 false alarms 94 initializing system 94 snow chains 231 system limits 94 warning lamp 95 Fluid reservoir refer to Filler neck for washer fluid 69 FM reception range 168 172 FM waveband 172 Fog lamps 111 indicator lamp 13 111 Folding rear backrest 126 Sports Wagon 127 Fold over rear backrest 126 Footbrake refer to Braking safely 136 Footwell lamps refer to Interior lamps 111 Forward fast CD changer 185 CD player 185 For your own safety 5 4 wheel drive system refer to xDrive 92 Freeway refer to Route criteria 154 Front airbags 99 Front armrest refer to Center armrest front 122 Online Edition for Par
133. amp 74 radar sensors 75 selecting distance 73 warning lamps 74 Active front head restraints 49 Active seat 52 Active seat ventilation 52 Active steering 98 warning lamp 99 Adapter for spare key 28 Adaptive brake assistant 91 Adaptive brake lamps refer to Brake force display 99 Adaptive Head Light 109 Add digits in mobile phone mode 202 270 Additives coolant 235 engine oil refer to Approved engine oils 235 Address book in navigation 151 Address for navigation deleting 153 entering 144 147 selecting 152 storing 151 storing current position 152 Add to address book 151 Add to destination list 147 148 Adjusting active backrest width 47 Adjusting interior temperature 114 Adjusting the tone during audio operation refer to Tone control 169 Adjusting thigh support 46 After door opened 48 After unlocking 48 Airbags 99 indicator warning lamp 101 indicator lamp for front passenger airbags 100 sitting safely 45 Air distribution automatic 114 manual 115 Airing refer to Ventilation 117 Air recirculation AUC Automatic recirculated air control 116 recirculated air mode 116 Air recirculation on off 55 Air supply automatic climate control 113 Air volume 115 AKI refer to Fuel quality 221 Alarm system 37 avoiding unintentional alarms 38 interior motion sensor 38 switching off al
134. amps can light up in different combinations and colors ha O E O O means that a Check Control message has been generated The symbol continues to be visible even when the Check Control message disappears after a short time The warning lamps and text messages are stored and can be displayed later also refer to page 84 Explanatory text messages Climate Text message at the bottom edge of the Con trol Display explain the meaning of the dis played indicator and warning lamps wy Washer fluid Insufficient washer fluid in fluid reservoir Refill as soon as possible refer Jee to Owner s Manual You can display additional information on most Check Control messages later e g on the cause of the malfunction and on corresponding need for action see below In urgent cases this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on 83 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Everything under control Exit the displayed information 4 Select the arrow and press the controller Hiding Check Control messages Press the CHECK button on turn signal lever Some Check Control messages are displayed until the malfunctions have been rectified They cannot be hidden If a number of malfunctions occur simultaneously they are displayed in succession Other messages are hidden after approx 20 seconds but remain stored
135. and press the controller fal Languages Text language English US ki O b E O O O Navigation voice instructions Driving tips Y The arrow view appears in the assistance window Navigation Communications Entertainment Mobility 5 cD i O Ge Z 143 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Destination entry Destination entry In entering your destination you can select from among the following options gt Entering a destination manually see below gt Entering destination via voice refer to page 147 gt Selecting destination using information refer to page 149 gt Selecting destination from a list refer to Destination list page 150 gt Selecting destination from address book refer to page 151 gt Selecting home address refer to page 153 After selecting your destination you can pro ceed to start the destination guidance refer to page 156 You can also store a navigation destination on the programmable memory buttons refer to page 21 Enter data only when the vehicle is sta tionary and always give priority to the applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road condi tions and the instructions issued by the naviga tion system If you do not observe this precau tion you can endanger the vehicle occupants and other road users 4 iDrive for operating principle r
136. are key in a safe place such as your wallet This key is not intended for regular use The spare key and integrated key fit the same locks Adapter for spare key The adapter is required so that the vehicle can be started with the spare key or radio readiness can be switched on Remove the adapter from the holder in the glove compartment and slide the spare key into the adapter before use Personal Profile The concept You can set anumber of functions of your BMW individually according to your preferences Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Personal Profile ensures that most of these set tings are stored for the remote control currently in use without you having to do anything When the vehicle is unlocked the corresponding remote control is detected and the settings stored for it are called up and carried out This means that you will always find your BMW set to your own personal settings even if another person with his her own remote control and settings has used the vehicle since the last time you drove it The individual settings are stored for a maximum of four remote controls for two with comfort access Personal Profile settings Details on the settings are provided on the specified pages gt Behavior of the central locking system when unlocking vehicle refer to page 30 gt Automatic locking of the vehicle refer to page 32 gt Programming buttons on steering wheel
137. arm 37 switching off tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor 38 tilt alarm sensor 38 All channels 179 All doors 30 Alloy wheels 240 All season tires refer to Winter tires 230 All stations requesting in radio mode 172 All wheel drive refer to xDrive 92 Alterations technical refer to For your own safety 5 Altering stretch of road 160 AM reception range 168 172 Antenna for mobile phone 194 Antifreeze coolant 235 washer fluid 69 Antilock Brake System ABS 90 Anti theft alarm system refer to Alarm system 37 Anti theft system refer to Central locking system 29 Approved axle loads refer to Weights 263 Approved engine oils 235 Approved gross vehicle weight refer to Weights 263 Armrest refer to Center armrest rear 126 Around the center console 14 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Around the steering wheel 10 Arrival time refer to Computer 80 refer to Starting destination guidance 156 Arrow display in navigation 157 Arrow display pop up instructions 143 Ashtray front 124 rear 125 Assist refer to BMW Assist 209 Assistance systems refer to Driving stability control systems 90 Assistance window 20 Assist window off 21 AUC Automatic recirculated air control 116 Audio 169 171 176 Audio 168 controls 168 switching on off 168 tone control 169 volume 169 Audio device external 1
138. as become heated up After a short time the system is automati cally switched down one level in order to pre vent excessive cooling 4 Active seat The seat cushion is actively varied by alter nately raising and lowering the right and left half of the seat cushion This reduces muscular ten sion and fatigue to help prevent lower back pain Press the button to switch on the LED lights up The action of the system is reduced and if need be switched off in order to reduce the load on the battery The LED remains lit If you switch off the active seat it can take up to 1 minute before the two halves of the seat cushion have returned to their initial position Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Mirrors Exterior mirrors The mirror on the passenger s side is more curved than the driver s mirror Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear Do not estimate the distance of following traffic based on what you see in the mirrors otherwise there is an increased acci dent risk 4 1 Adjusting 2 Switching to the other mirror or to the auto matic curb monitor 3 Folding mirrors in and out Storing the mirror positions refer to Seat mir ror and steering wheel memory on page 47 Adjusting manually You can also adjust the mirrors manually by pressing against the outer edges of their mirror glass Folding mirrors in and out Pressing button 3 allows you to fold
139. athway lighting 240 s O High heam assistant O Welcome light 6 Select Daytime running lamps and press the controller R The daytime running lamps are switched on The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Adaptive Head Light The concept Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp control system that enables better illumination of the road surface Depending on the steering angle and other parameters the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road In tight curves at speeds up to approx 45 mph 70 km h e g on mountainous roads or when negotiating curves turning lamps are switched on that light up the inside area of the curve Activating Adaptive Head Light With the ignition switched on turn the light switch into position 3 refer to page 107 The turning lamps are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals To avoid blinding oncoming traffic the Adaptive Head Light directs light towards the front pas senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill When driving in reverse only the turning lamps are active and illuminate the outer area of curves High beams roadside parking lamps 1 High beams 2 Headlamp flasher 3 Roadside parking lamps Roadside parking lamps left or right You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one side of your vehicle when parkin
140. ation is stored gt 7 KROQ 2100 58 The stations of the last selection criterion are displayed once again after a short time From radio readiness the stations are stored for the remote control currently in use About programmable memory buttons You can also store a station on the programma ble memory buttons also refer to page 21 1 Select a station 2 Press and hold desired button Changing amemory position 1 Select Presets and press the controller 2 Select the desired station Set is selected 3 Press the controller Other menu items are displayed 4 Select Store and press the controller ET py i Presets BY RDS Tone Scan 5 Turn the controller until the desired mem ory position is selected The number of the memory position appears beside the name or frequency of the station 6 Press the controller The station is stored RDS Radio Data System In the FM frequency range additional informa tion is transmitted via RDS If the reception con ditions are good the station names are shown on the Control Display If the reception is weak or disrupted it can take some time before the station names are displayed Switching RDS on off 1 Select FM and press the controller Set is selected 2 Press the controller Other menu items are displayed 3 Select RDS and press the controller UT FM Presets Store Tone Scan A RDS is activate
141. atures and accessories both for driving and for your own safety comfort and convenience are described here Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600810 ORC Opening and closing Opening and closing Keys remote control 1 Remote control with integrated key 2 Sparekey 3 Adapter for spare key in glove compart ment Remote control with integrated key Each remote control contains a battery which is charged in the ignition lock while driving Drive a longer distance with each remote control at least twice a year to keep the battery charged For comfort access the remote control con tains a replaceable battery refer to page 40 Depending on which remote control is detected by the vehicle during unlocking different set tings are activated and executed in the vehicle refer to Personal Profile page 28 Information on the required for maintenance is also stored in the remote control refer to Ser vice data in remote control page 237 Integrated key Press button 1 to unlock the key 28 The integrated key fits the following locks gt Glove compartment refer to page 122 gt Sports Wagon floor panel flap in cargo bay refer to page 128 gt Driver s door refer to page 32 gt Luggage compartment lid refer to page 33 New remote controls To obtain additional or replace lost keys new remote controls with an integrated key are available at your BMW center Spare key Store the sp
142. automatic transmission Follow the instructions on page 62 so that the vehicle can roll Cargo loading To avoid loading the tires beyond their EN approved carrying capacity never over load the vehicle Overloading can lead to over heating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires The ultimate result can assume the form of a sudden blow out 4 Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo bay otherwise the vehicle could be dam aged 4 Determining loading limit 1 Locate the following statement on your vehicle s placard The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or YYY kg as otherwise the vehicle may be damaged and unstable driving con ditions may result 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or YYY kg 4 Theresulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib pas sengers in your vehicle the amount of avail able cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1 400 Ibs minus 750 Ibs 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a
143. avily gt if you signal System limits The leaving lane warning cannot serve as EN a substitute for your personal judgment in determining the course of the road If the system issues a warning do not move the steering wheel with unnecessary severity as otherwise you could loose control of the vehi cle lt The function of the system may be limited in the following example situations gt in heavy fog rain or snowfall gt with worn away poorly visible limit lines or lines that run together or apart or are unclear e g in road construction areas V when limit lines are covered by snow ice dirt or a great deal of water in tight curves or on narrow roads when limit lines are not white when limit lines are covered by objects VV VV when driving up close behind a vehicle driv ing ahead V with bright counter light V when the windshield is fogged up dirty or covered with stickers vignettes etc in the area of the inside rearview mirror 106 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Lamps Parking lamps low beams Lights off and daytime running lamps Parking lamps and daytime running lamps Low beams and welcome lamps QO NO Automatic headlamp control daytime run ning lamps welcome lamps Adaptive Head Light and high beam assistant If you open the driver s door with the ignition switched off the exterior lighting is switched off when the light switc
144. ays Cockpi 16 15 14 12 r 1 i i 1 l M 14 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 1 Microphone for hands free mode for telephone and for voice command system 23 Reading lamps 112 SOS initiating an emergency request 253 Interiorlamps 111 a fF N Glass sunroof electric 41 Panorama glass sunroof 42 Passenger airbag status lamp 100 7 Control Display 16 Displays for menu navigation 8 Hazard warning flashers 9 Central locking system 32 10 Automatic climate control 113 Temperature setting left right 114 Automatic air distribution and volume 114 TEMP AUTO Cooling function 116 AUC Automatic recirculated air A SD control 116 AP Recirculated air mode 116 MAX Maximum cooling 116 D Se Air volume 115 Defrosting windows and removing condensation 115 tr Rear window defroster 115 11 Changing gt radio station 172 gt track 168 12 Ejecting gt navigation DVD 142 gt audioCD 181 13 Programmable memory buttons 21 14 Drive for navigation DVDs 142 15 Drive for audio CDs 181 16 Switching Entertainment sound output on off and adjusting volume 168 v O S D i lt 1 ni Heated seats 51 cs Active seat ventilation 52 Adjusting active backrest width 47 i Active seat 52 Py PDC Park Distance Control 89 DTC DTC Dynamic Traction Control 91 Opening luggage compartment lid ST t
145. beams will come on for a brief period You can set the duration or deactivate the func tion via iDrive iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 Open the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu Select Settings and press the controller PS Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Lighting is selected and press the controller Door FER O Triple turn signal O Daytime running lamps Pathway lighting 240 5 O High beam assistant O Welcome light 6 Select Pathway lighting and press the controller 108 7 Turnthe controller to select the desired duration 8 Press the controller to apply the setting The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Daytime running lamps The daytime running lamps light up in posi tion O 1 and 3 If the light switch remains in position 1 the parking lamps light up after the ignition is switched off Activating deactivating daytime running lamps iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Open the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller A Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Lighting is selected and press the controller Door locks RO O Triple turn signal O Daytime running lamps P
146. ce in destination entry 145 State inspection 82 Station refer to Radio 172 Status 82 Status information on Control Display 20 Status of this Owner s Manual at time of printing 5 Steam cleaners 239 240 Steering wheel adjustment 54 automatic adjustment refer to Steering wheel memory 47 buttons on steering wheel 11 easy entry exit 54 heating 54 lock refer to Ignition lock 61 memory 47 programmable buttons 54 shift paddles 66 Steering with variable ratio refer to Active steering 98 Steptronic refer to Automatic transmission with Steptronic 63 refer to Sport automatic transmission 66 refer to Sport program and manual mode 64 Stop in stopwatch mode 86 Stopwatch 86 Stopwatch 85 Storage area package Sports Wagon 129 Storage compartments 123 Store in address book in navigation 152 Store in radio mode 174 180 Storing 242 Storing current position 152 Storing radio stations 174 Storing sitting position refer to Seat mirror and steering wheel memory 47 285 Oo cD fia Gen 9 ad Everything from A to Z Storing tires 230 Storing your vehicle 242 Street in destination entry 146 Summer tires refer to Wheels and tires 222 Sun blinds 121 Surround Settings Tone control 170 171 SW waveband 172 Swinging up floor panel Sports Wagon 128 Switches refer to Cockpit 10 Switching automatically be
147. ce Request start service REXFORD DRIVE BEVERLY HILLS CA Press the controller Select Start service and press the con troller You will be connected to BMW Customer Rela tions by the BMW Assist Response Center When you call the concierge service of BMW Assist you can for example obtain information on current events filling stations or hotels and have their phone numbers and addresses transmitted Many hotels can be booked Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG directly through the BMW Assist concierge ser vice The concierge service must be enabled sepa rately by the BMW Assist Response Center Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Move the controller forward to select Communication Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until BMW Assist is selected and press the controller Phone Concierge Start service Select Concierge and press the control ler EMW Assist t Roadside Assistance Start service Select Start service and press the con troller The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with a BMW Assist concierge Select the received message if necessary and press the controller i BMW Assist Concierge t Start service ek Select Options and press the controller REXFORD DRIVE BEVERLY HILLS CA 01234 1234567890 Select a menu item With Call you
148. ced in city traffic and stop amp go operation For this reason it is a good idea to switch these functions off when they are not really needed Having maintenance carried out Have the vehicle serviced regularly in order to achieve the optimum economy and service life of your vehicle BMW recommends having the maintenance performed by a BMW center Also please pay attention to the BMW maintenance system refer to page 237 General driving notes Closing luggage compartment lid tailgate Operate the vehicle only when the lug gage compartment lid tailgate is com pletely closed Otherwise exhaust fumes could enter the interior of the vehicle lt N Q D gt m If it is absolutely necessary to drive with the lug gage compartment lid open 1 Close all windows and the glass sunroof or panorama glass sunroof 2 Increase the air volume of the automatic cli mate control to a high level refer to page 115 Hot exhaust system As in all vehicles extremely high temper atures are generated on the exhaust sys tem Do not remove the heat shields installed adjacent to it and never apply undercoating to them When driving standing at idle and while parking take care to avoid possible contact between the hot exhaust system and any highly flammable materials such as hay leaves grass etc Such contact could lead to a fire and with it the risk of serious property damage as well as personal injury Do not
149. ck the cover using the screwdriver from the toolkit at the points indicated if necessary refer to page 243 2 Remove the Allen wrench from the holder next to the toolkit and insert it into the open ing provided Move the sunroof in the desired direction The arrow below indi cates the rotation direction for closing dE 44 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Adjusting Sitting safely The ideal sitting position can make a vital con tribution to relaxed fatigue free driving In the interaction with the safety belts the head restraints and the airbags the sitting position plays an important role in an accident To ensure that the safety systems operate with optimal efficiency we strongly urge you to observe the instructions contained in the fol lowing section For additional information on transporting chil dren safely refer to page 56 Airbags Always maintain an adequate distance between yourself and the airbags Always hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at the 9 o clock and 3 o clock positions to mini mize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms in the event of airbag deployment No one and nothing Is to come between the air bags and the seat occupant Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument panel otherwise leg i
150. closing pro ceed as follows 1 Pullthe switch beyond the resistance point and hold The pinch protection system is limited and the window opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value 2 Pullthe switch beyond the resistance point and hold again within approx 4 seconds The window closes without the pinch pro tection system Safety switch With the safety switch you can prevent the rear windows from being opened or closed via the switches in the rear passenger area by chil dren for example The LED lights up when this safety feature is activated Always press the safety switch when chil dren ride in the rear otherwise uncon trolled closing of the windows could lead to injuries 4 Glass sunroof electric The glass sunroof is ready for operation with the ignition switched on refer to page 61 To prevent injuries exercise care when EN closing the glass sunroof and keep it in your field of vision until it is closed Always take along the remote control when you leave the vehicle otherwise children could for example operate the roof and injure them selves 4 Raising Press the switch The closed glass sunroof is raised and the slid ing visor opens slightly Do not use force to close the sliding visor with the glass sunroof in its raised posi tion otherwise the mechanism will be dam aged 4 Opening closing gt Slide the switch back to the resistance point The glass sunroof and
151. cond field from the top select Phone and press the controller 7 Select the desired mobile phone With two drives gt Move the controller to the rear to change into the bottom field gt Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG With a single drive Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller w Bluetooth a i Phane Pair new phone Phones previously paired Mobile phone 2 Select Delete device and press the con troller _ FF Bluetooth Ta xt Phone t Move device up Mobile phone 1 Mobile phone 2 The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from the list The phone book entries and the lists of stored phone numbers are also deleted Bluetooth technology is not approved in all countries Observe the applicable local regulations Temporarily deactivate the Blue tooth link between the vehicle and the mobile phone if necessary If the Bluetooth link is deactivated you cannot operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be used via the mobile phone e g a laptop com puter 4 To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between your vehicle and your mobile phone Remove the mobile phone from the cradle and switch it off Press the MENU button to open the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu Select Settings an
152. control fail to operate due to interference of this kind unlock and lock the vehicle via the door lock using a key If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle using the remote control then the battery is discharged Use this remote control during an extended drive this will recharge the battery refer to page 28 31 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Opening and closing For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC Federal Communication Commission regulations Operation is gov erned by the following FCC ID LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS LX8CAS2 Compliance statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions gt This device must not cause harmful inter ference and gt this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation gt Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user s authority to operate this equipment 4 Opening and closing Using door lock FN Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if persons are inside as unlocking from the inside is not possible without special knowl TE 32 When unlocking 1 Turning the key once unlocks the driver s door and the fuel filler door 2 Turning the key a second time unlocks the remaining doors and the luggage compart ment lid tail
153. cording times refer to Stopwatch 85 Redialing with mobile phone 207 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Redial in mobile phone mode 202 Reflectors refer to Tail lamps 246 Refueling 220 Releasing hood 232 Releasing the locks refer to Unlocking 39 Relock door if not opened 33 Remaining distance refer to Cruising range 79 Remaining distance to destination refer to Computer 80 Remote control 28 comfort access 38 garage door opener 120 luggage compartment lid 31 malfunction 31 40 replacing battery 40 tailgate 31 Removing condensation on the windows 115 Repeat directory in audio mode 184 Repeat in audio mode 184 Repeat track in audio mode 184 Replacement fuses 252 Replacement of tires refer to Changing wheels 248 Replacement remote control refer to New remote controls 28 Replacing bulbs refer to Lamps and bulbs 244 Replacing tires 230 Replacing wheels tires refer to New wheels and tires 229 Reporting safety defects 7 Reserve warning refer to Fuel gauge 79 Reset 95 97 stopwatch 86 tone settings 171 Reset refer to Resetting tone settings 171 resetting FIM 95 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Residual heat 116 Restraint systems for children 56 refer to Safety belts 50 Retaining straps refer to Storage area package Sports Wagon 129 Retreaded tires 230 Reve
154. couring products Keep all liquids away from the equipment Otherwise corrosion or damage to surfaces or electrical components can occur 4 CD DVD player Do not use cleaning CDs they can dam age parts of the player lt Storing your vehicle When storing your vehicle for longer than three months please seek the advice of your BMW center or a workshop that works in accordance with BMW guidelines 242 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Replacing components Onboard toolkit Sedan The onboard toolkit is located in the luggage compartment lid Loosen the wing nut to open Sports Wagon The onboard toolkit is located in the left side panel of the cargo bay Wiper blade replacement Front 1 Fold the wiper arm out and grasp firmly 2 Press the safety tabs together while sliding the wiper blade toward the front to disen gage it 3 Mount the new wiper blade and slide in until itis heard to engage Rear 1 Lift off the wiper arm completely and pull off the wiper blade refer to arrow 2 Mount the new wiper blade and press on until it is heard to engage gt z O 243 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Replacing components Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu tion to vehicle safety You must be duly diligent in replacing them BMW recommends having your BMW center perform any work that you do
155. ct a destination that is as close as possible to the original gt the destination guidance does not accept an address without the street name On the navigation DVD no downtown area can be determined for the city or town entered Enter any street or a destination such as the railway station in the selected town and then start the destination guid ance gt you want to enter a destination for the des tination guidance but it is not possible to select the letters for your desired entry The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded In this case the system will not offer you any let ters to choose from Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original the system stops furnishing directions on which way to turn as you approach intersec tions You are driving in an area that has not yet been completely recorded on the naviga tion DVD Instead of an arrow indicating a turn you will see an arrow which indicates the general direction of your planned route Or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new recommended route the navigation system does not react to entries If the battery was disconnected it takes about 10 minutes before the system is once again operational O gt Z 165 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG an Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 31
156. ct tire inflation pressures The system is inactive and cannot display a flat tire if a wheel has been mounted without TPM electronics e g a compact wheel or if TPM is temporarily interfered with by other systems or devices which use the same radio frequency Status display on Control Display The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the tires TPM takes the fact that the tire pressure changes during driving into account A correc tion is only required if requested by TPM with the color Green The tire pressure matches the learned set state TPM active is displayed on the Control Dis play 96 One wheel is yellow Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire A message appears on the Control Display All wheels are yellow Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in several tires A message appears on the Control Display Gray The system cannot detect a flat tire Reasons for this can be gt TPM is being reset gt Temporary interference due to systems or devices which use the same radio fre quency gt Malfunction Resetting system Reset the system again after each correc tion of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change 4 Resetting finishes during driving which can be interrupted at any time When driving resumes resetting is continued automatically Do not reset the system when driving with a compact wheel i
157. ctions Top 8 203 touch tone dialing refer to Tone dialing method 204 Mobile phone battery 208 Monitor refer to iDrive 16 Monitoring pressure of tires refer to Flat Tire Monitor 94 Monitor on off 55 Most recent mobile phone numbers 203 MP3 compressed audio files 181 USB audio interface 188 Multi function steering wheel refer to Buttons on steering wheel 11 Multifunction switch refer to Turn signals headlamp flasher 67 refer to Wiper system 68 Music tracks finding 183 random play sequence 184 sampling scan 183 Mute on off 55 MW waveband 172 My Info 214 My Info refer to BMW Assist My Info 213 N Navigation 80 144 Navigation destination entering manually 144 home address 153 selecting via map 148 Navigation drive installation location 142 Navigation DVD 142 Navigation instructions refer to Switching voice instructions on off 159 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Navigation system 142 address book 151 bypassing route sections 160 destination entry 144 destination guidance in assistance window 142 destination list 150 displaying current position 163 displaying route 157 entering a destination manually 144 entering destination via voice 147 last destinations 150 navigation DVD 142 route list 159 searching for a special destinat
158. ctivation Press the button again the LED goes out Automatic deactivation After driving approx 165 ft 50 m or at over approx 20 mph 30 km h the system is switched off and the LED goes out You can reactivate the system manually as needed AL e ho ra lt e Signal tones When nearing an object the position is corre spondingly indicated by an interval tone Thus an object detected to the left rear of the vehicle will be indicated by a signal tone from the left rear speaker etc As the distance between vehicle and object decreases the intervals between the tones become shorter If the dis tance to the nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft 30 cm then a continuous tone sounds An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx 3 seconds gt if you remain in front of an object that was only detected by one of the corner sensors gt if you drive parallel to a wall Malfunction The LED in the button flashes and a message appears on the Control Display PDC is mal functioning Have the system checked To prevent this problem keep the sensors clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that they will continue to operate effectively Do not spray the sensors with high pressure clean ing jets for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 4 in 10 cm to them PDC with visual warning You can also have the system show distances to objects on the Control Display Objects that are
159. d The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use 67 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG iving Dr Wiper system Switching on wipers Switching off wipers or brief wipe Activating deactivating rain sensor mh ON Cleaning windshield headlamps and BMW Night Vision camera 5 Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level Switching on wipers Pull the lever upward arrow 1 The lever automatically returns to its initial posi tion when released Normal wiper speed Press once The system reverts to operation in the intermit tent mode when the vehicle is stationary Fast wiper speed Press twice or press beyond the resistance point The system reverts to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary Rain sensor The wiper operation is controlled automatically as a function of the rain intensity The rain sen sor is located on the windshield directly in front of the interior rearview mirror 68 Activating rain sensor Press the button arrow 3 The LED in the but ton lights up Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level Turn the knurled wheel 5 Deactivating rain sensor Press the button again arrow 3 The LED goes out Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash Failure to do so could result in damage caused by undes ired wiper operation lt Cleaning windshield headlamps and BMW Night Vision camera Pull the lev
160. d The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use p 3 fa ad S pur Lu Weather news flashes Weather Radio is a service of the National Oce anic and Atmospheric Administration NOAA of the US Department of Trade Weather news flashes are repeated every 4 to 6 minutes and are routinely updated at intervals of 1 to 3 hours and more often when necessary Most stations operate 24 hours a day In case of a storm the National Weather Service interrupts the routine weather news and transmits special warning messages instead If you have a ques tion about NOAA Weather Radio please con tact the nearest office of the National Weather Service Details are also provided on the Inter net at WWW nws noaa gov 175 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Select Off and press the controller Select WB and press the controller J The reception of digital stations is activated HJ This symbol is displayed when a station is ee being received digitally if FM i Presets CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 5 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 6 CHANNEL CHANNEI CHANNE CHAN Select a station The station for weather news flashes may be unavailable in some regions With some stations the digital signals are not transmitted simultaneously with the analog sig nals If you are in an area in which the selected station is not continuously received digitally playback changes b
161. d Approved front axle load Approved rear axle load Approved roof load capacity Cargo bay capacity Ibs kg Ibs kg Ibs kg los kg los kg Ibs kg Ibs kg Ibs kg cu ft l Never exceed either the approved axle loads or the gross vehicle weight 528i 3 505 1 590 3 571 1 620 4 607 2 090 4 673 2 120 1 102 500 2 22711 010 2 601 1 180 220 100 18 4 520 535i 3 660 1 660 3 703 1 680 4 87212 210 4 872 2 210 1 102 500 2 359 1 070 2 711 1 230 220 100 18 4 520 528xi 3 670 1 710 3 704 1 730 4 839 2 195 4 883 2 215 1 102 500 2 315 1 050 2 689 1 220 220 100 18 4 520 263 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 550i 3 946 1 790 3 968 1 800 5 048 2 290 5 070 2 300 1 102 500 2 469 1 120 2 733 1 240 220 100 18 4 520 535xi 3 902 1 770 3 946 1 790 5 004 2 270 5 048 2 290 1 102 500 2 315 1 050 2 689 1 220 220 100 18 4 520 V Y Y V x Technical data Sports Wagon Curb weight gt Manual transmission gt Automatic transmission Approved gross vehicle weight gt Manual transmission gt Automatic transmission Load Approved front axle load Approved rear axle load Approved roof load capacity Cargo bay capacity Ibs kg Ibs kg Ibs kg Ibs kg Ibs kg Ibs kg Ibs kg Ibs kg cu ft l Never exceed either the approved axle loads or the gross vehicle weight Capacities Fuel tank of that reserve 550i W
162. d underinflation or excessive loading either sep arately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 4 RSC run flat tires You will recognize run flat tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire refer to page 229 M S Winter and all season tires These have better winter properties than sum mer tires XL Indicates specially reinforced tires Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Tire condition Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the tread Check the tread depth Minimum tread depth The tread depth should not drop below 0 12 in 3 mm although for example European legisla tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of 0 063 in 1 6 mm At tread depths below 0 12 in 3 mm there is an increased risk of high speed hydroplaning even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface When winter tires wear down past a tread depth of 0 16 in 4 mm they become perceptibly less suitable for winter conditions For the sake of safety new tires should be installed f Wear indicators at the tread groove base refer to arrow are distributed over the tire s circum ference and are marked on the side of the tire with TWI Tread Wear Indicator If the tire tread has been driven down to the wear indicators a tread depth of 0 063 in 1 6 mm has been reached Wh
163. d and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire infla tion pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety fea ture your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illumi nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underin 98 flated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a sub stitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the sys tem detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue u
164. d menu item gt To dial a received phone number select Call and press the controller gt If your vehicle has a navigation system To adopt a received destination address into the navigation system select Select as destination and press the controller gt To delete a received message select Delete and press the controller Updating BMW Assist Displaying and updating services You will be notified of any changes in the ser vices offered by BMW Assist In this case you should update the service functions 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller Info sources Display o P lt Audio Display settings Steering wheel buttons Vehicle Tires Language Units Time Date 4 Turn the controller until BMW Service set tings is selected and press the controller i Vo Settings vE Vehicle Tires 7 Language Units Age Time Date Ma Traffic info settings i Bluetooth 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Enabled Assist services is selected and press the controller The currently available BMW Assist ser vices are displayed 214 Onine Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Select Options and press the controller Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller
165. d press the controller Select Bluetooth and press the controller Vehicle Tires Lanquage Units Time Date Traffic Into settings BMW Service settings Change into the second field from the top select Settings and press the controller Fa Bluetooth Phone Help EY Bluetooth communication active Select Bluetooth communication active and press the controller to activate or deac tivate the link Bluetooth L na E setAnQs The Bluetooth link is activated EJ The Bluetooth link is deactivated 199 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Telephoning Adjusting volume Turn the knob during a call to select the desired volume This volume for the hands free system is main tained evenif the other audio sources are set to minimum volume You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel refer to page 11 The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Operation via iDrive You can operate the following functions via iDrive gt Accepting refusing a call gt Dialing phone numbers gt Dialing phone numbers from the phone book gt Dialing stored phone numbers e g from the list of accepted calls gt Ending a call When the ignition and radio readiness are switched off e g after removing the remote control from the ignition lock you can continue an ongoing call via the hands free system for no more
166. d to it is necessary that you read all of the pages relating to this system before use Carefully read and observe the information on the system limitations beginning on page 75 to obtain a good command of the system and its range of applications lt 4 Brake pedal feel When the system brakes and you also depress the brake pedal a somewhat different braking feel results Professional navigation system If a navigation DVD is in the drive refer to page 142 within limits the system adjusts the accelerating and braking behavior of the vehicle to the road you are driving on To ensure that the system is informed of the current course of the road always use the latest navigation DVD if possible 4 When the vehicle position is unknown e g when you leave the map area this influence of the navigation system is not available Applications Please try the system first during sparse traffic and clear road conditions so that you can get used to the system After you have experience and understand the system only then use it during normal traffic As with conventional cruise control systems active cruise control in no way reduces or sub stitutes for the driver s own personal experi ence responsibility alertness and awareness in adjusting speed braking or otherwise control ling the vehicle The driver should decide when to use the system on the basis of road traffic visibility and weather conditions Active cruis
167. demark of Johnson Controls Inc 4 120 Programming 1 Memory buttons 2 LED Fixed code hand held transmitters 1 Switch on ignition refer to page 61 2 When starting operation for the first time Press the left and right hand memory button 1 for approx 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes quickly All stored programs are deleted 3 Hold the original hand held transmitter at a distance of approx 4 in 10 cm to 12 in 30 cm from the memory buttons 1 m The required distance between the hand held transmitter and the mem ory buttons 1 depends on the relevant sys tem of the original hand held transmitter used lt 4 Simultaneously press the transmit button on the original hand held transmitter and the desired memory button 1 on the inte grated universal remote control The LED 2 flashes slowly at first As soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly release both buttons If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx 15 seconds alter the distance and repeat the step 5 To program other original hand held trans mitters repeat steps 3 and 4 The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand held transmitter Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG You can operate the device when the engine is running or when the ignition is switched on gt If the device fails to function even after repeated programming check whether the original hand held tran
168. dent on driving style and driving conditions Checking engine oil level Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil level check The condition for the most accurate indication of the oil level possible is measurement with the engine at operating temperature i e following an uninterrupted drive of at least 6 miles 10 km You can display the oil level on the Control Dis play while driving or when stopped on a level surface with the engine running iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Er Trafic into tb Travel info TT Service info Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu Turn the controller until Info sources is selected and press the controller Settings Display oll lt gt 4 Turnthe controller until Service Info is selected and press the controller Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Service requirements is selected and press the controller Check Contr p a s Engine oil levels Engine oil level O K 234 6 Change to the second field from the top if necessary Turn the controller until Engine oil level is selected and press the control ler The oil level is displayed Possible messages gt gt Engine oil level O K No measurement available Updating engine oil level measurement Engine oil level is being measured This process can take approx 1 minute wh
169. display pop up instructions 6 Select Text language and press the con troller You can change the language of the text displays 7 Select and activate the desired language by pressing the controller The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Technology for comfort convenience and safety PDC Park Distance Control The concept The PDC assists you when you are parking Acoustic signals and an optical display alert you to the approach of an object from behind your vehicle To measure the distance there are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper The range of these sensors is approx 7 ft 2 m However an acoustic warning first sounds for the sensors at the front and at the two rear cor ners at approx 24 in 60 cm and for the center rear sensors at approx 5 ft 1 50 m PDC is a parking aid that can indicate objects when they are approached slowly as is usually the case when parking Avoid approaching an object at high speed oth erwise the physical circumstances would mean that the system warning was too late lt Automatic activation The system starts to operate approx one sec ond after you shift into reverse or move the selector lever into position R with the engine running or the ignition switched on Wait this short time before driving off Manual activation Press the button the LED lights up Manual dea
170. e cooled down to exclude contact with hot engine components Otherwise there is a dan ger of fire and to personal safety if the fluid is spilled 4 v i O All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser Voir Fill with water and if required with a washer antifreeze according to manufacturer s recom mendations In order to maintain the mixture ratio mix 17 _ the washer fluid before filling lt Capacity Sedan Approx 3 2 US quarts 3 liters with headlamp washer system approx 5 3 US quarts 5 liters Sports Wagon approx 5 3 US quarts 5 liters Cruise control The concept The cruise control is available for use at speeds of approx 20 mph 30 km h and higher The vehicle stores and maintains the speed that you set using the lever mounted on the steering col umn To maintain the specified speed the sys tem brakes if the engine braking effect is not sufficient on a downhill grade Speed can drop on uphill grades if the engine output is insuffi cient Do not use the cruise control under driv Ing conditions that do not permit a con stant speed e g when driving on winding roads in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions such as snow rain ice loose road surface and poor visibility Otherwise you could loose con trol of the vehicle and cause an accident 69 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 1 Maintaining storing and increasing speed 2 Ma
171. e E button gt If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo bay is detected in the locked vehi cle after closing the luggage compartment lid tailgate or the rear window the lid or rear win dow opens again The hazard warning flashers flash and a signal sounds lt Sports Wagon opening rear window separately Press the button on the rear window refer to page 34 ir e mur e O Switching on radio readiness By pressing the Start Stop button you switch on the radio readiness refer to page 61 gt When doing so do not depress the brake or clutch pedal otherwise the engine will start immediately Starting engine You can start the engine or switch on the igni tion if a remote control is located in the interior of the vehicle It need not be inserted in the igni tion lock refer to page 61 If you take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle with the engine running a warning lamp lights up In addition a message appears on the Control Display As long as no remote control is detected it is only possible to restart the engine within approx 10 seconds after it is switched off Switching off engine with automatic and sport automatic transmission The engine can only be switched off in trans mission position P refer to page 62 To switch off the engine in transmission posi tion N the remote control must be inserted in the ignition lock Before driving into a car
172. e control is intended for use on highway type 71 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG v i O iving Dr roadways where traffic is moving relatively smoothly as well as in slow moving traffic Do not use the system in city driving in complex driving situations heavy traffic such as during rush hour on curvy winding roads slippery roads or roads with sharp curves such as high way off ramps during inclement weather such as snow strong rain or fog or when entering interchanges service parking areas or toll booths It is also important to regulate your vehicle s speed and distance setting within applicable legal limits Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if necessary espe cially when the system is actively following a vehicle in front of you Otherwise driving condi tions can result which lead to a violation of the law or elevated risk of an accident The minimum initial activation speed is 20 mph 30 km h and the maximum speed is 110 mph 180 km h However you can also activate the system while stopped refer to While stopped page 74 One lever for all functions 1 Storing and increasing desired speed 2 Storing and reducing desired speed 3 Interrupting refer to page 73 or deactivating system refer to page 74 4 Activating stored desired speed and dis tance refer to page 73 or driving off refer to While stopped page 74 5 Selecting distanc
173. e 28 Z Zoom with BMW Night Vision 105 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG More about BMW bmwusa com Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG The Ultimate Driving Machine 01 41 2 600 310 ue
174. e Request Select Call and press the controller Contact is established 204 The tone dialing method is required for access to network services or for controlling devices e g remote checking of an answering machine This function is available when a connection has been established Establish connection Ta Phone 4 Active calls With a single drive Press the controller Select Keypad and press the controller With two drives Move the controller backwards until the bottom field is selected Select the desired character and press the controller Each character is sent immediately and confirmed by a tone depending on the mobile phone model 123456789 ABCDEFGHUKLMN 4 4 Keypad Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Changing between mobile phone and hands free system From mobile phone to hands free system You can continue calls begun outside the Blue tooth range of the vehicle via the hands free system when the motor is running or the igni tion is switched on Depending on your mobile phone the system automatically changes over to the hands free mode For mobile phones that do not automatically change over to the hands free mode gt Depending on the mobile phone model used the conversation can be continued via the hands free system if necessary Act according to what is shown on the mobile phone display refer to the operating instructions of your mob
175. e at your BMW center Four lashing eyes mounted in the cargo bay are used to secure these heavy duty cargo straps refer to illustration gt Please observe the special instructions supplied with the heavy duty cargo straps Position and secure the cargo as described above so that it cannot endan ger the vehicle s occupants for example if sud den braking or evasive maneuvers are neces Sary Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle weight or either of the approved axle loads refer to page 263 as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard and may also place you in viola tion of traffic safety laws You should never transport unsecured heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment as they could fly around and pose a safety hazard to the vehicle s occupants during abrupt brak ing or evasive maneuvers Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten the heavy duty cargo straps Do not secure cargo with the upper attachment points for LATCH refer to page 58 otherwise you could damage them 4 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Roof mounted luggage rack special rack system is available as an option for your BMW Please comply with the precau tions included with the installation instructions Mounting points The mounting points are located in the door openings or on the roof rails Loading roof mounted luggage rack Because roof racks raise the vehicle s center of gravity whe
176. e buttons on the steering wheel refer to page 54 gt using iDrive iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until HDC is selected and press the controller Lighting Door locks b gt 6 Select HDC on and press the controller HDC is shown in the instrument cluster If the vehicle applies the brakes a message is displayed on the Control Display for approx 20 seconds Deactivating HDC When you use the programmable buttons on the steering wheel or via iDrive the HDC display goes out HDC is automatically deactivated at speeds greater than approximately 37 mph 60 km h Using HDC Manual transmission Use HDC in low gears and reverse gear Automatic transmission You can use HDC in every drive position Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Displays in instrument cluster 2ST te 032050 123 8 1 Display for target speed 2 HDC display Malfunction in driving stability control systems The warning lamp for the brake system BRAKE lights up together with the indicator lamps for ABS DSC and Tire Pressure ABS Monitor or Flat Tire Monitor mes sage appears on the Control
177. e command is displayed on the Control Display Entertainment yy This symbol is shown on the Control Display when you can input additional commands 23 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG v O S D i lt Driving tips Navigation Communications Entertainment Mobility o oO v i V W V x Voice command system If no other commands are possible then oper ate the equipment via iDrive Terminating or canceling voice command system Press the i button on the steering wheel or ptl Cancel Commands Having possible commands read aloud You can have the system read aloud the possi ble commands related to the selected menu item on the Control Display To have the system list the possible com mands p Options For example if you have selected CD the system will read aloud the possible commands for operating the CD player and the CD changer Opening help m Help lt Using alternative commands There are often anumber of commands to runa function e g wt Radio ont or Turn radio ont Running functions directly with short commands With short commands you can run certain func tions directly regardless of which menu item is selected refer to page 265 Opening start menu wt Main menus Example selecting a track 1 Switch on Entertainment sound output if necessary 2 Press the f button on the steering wheel
178. e controller 184 Onine Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Fast forward reverse Buttons next to CD player Press and hold the ER button for the corre sponding direction CD magazine The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed in the glove compartment Removing CD magazine To insert CDs into the CD magazine 1 or remove them from it you must first remove the magazine from the CD changer Press button 2 the CD magazine 1 slides out Wait at least 2 seconds before pushing in the magazine again so that the inserted CDs can be read in again Inserting removing CDs into from CD magazine When inserting or removing CDs remember to hold them by their edges taking care to avoid touching the data side with its reflective CD memory surface Inserting CDs Insert one CD into each compartment of the magazine with the labeled side up Removing CDs Pull out the desired tray and remove the CD Inserting CD magazine oa par eb mur Lu i F L 11 11 1 BET ilp Dlia deed mi P RS TION CEST rin iF RE Ji Push in the CD magazine as far as possible in the direction of the arrow The CD changer reads in the loaded CDs and is then ready for operation 185 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG CD player and CD changer Notes BMW CD DVD players and changers are EN officially designated C
179. e is available before opening Sedan Opening from inside 1 Press button 1 or button 2 the luggage com partment lid opens unless it has been locked 33 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Opening and closing Opening from outside Press the button on the luggage compartment lid or the EJ button on the remote control for approx 1 second the luggage compartment lid opens All keys refer to page 28 fit the luggage com partment lid lock Locking separately Turn a key in the lock of the luggage compart ment lid to the right past a resistance point and remove it in the horizontal position This locks the luggage compartment lid and disconnects it from the central locking system If you then hand over the remote control without the integrated key refer to page 28 no access is possible via the luggage compartment lid This is an advantage when using valet parking for example Unlocking again and opening manually Turn the key toward the left up to the stop the luggage compartment lid opens gt If you use the lock to unlock the luggage compartment lid while the alarm system is armed the alarm will be triggered You should therefore unlock the vehicle ahead of time If the 34 alarm is inadvertently triggered switch off the alarm refer to page 37 4 Closing Make sure that the closing path of the luggage compartment lid is clear other wise injur
180. e tested for proper function by briefly lighting up during starting of the engine or when the ignition is switched on Explanatory text messages Climate Entertainment Text messages at the bottom edge of the Con trol Display explain the meaning of the dis played indicator and warning lamps ww Washer fluid Insufficient washer fluid in fluid reservoir Refill as soon as possible reter to Owner s Manual 103 5 Tull 01 45 PM Additional information e g on the cause of a malfunction and on the corresponding need to take action can be displayed via the Check Con trol refer to page 83 if iu a J A Fi dl i a K a fo Mt ae In urgent cases this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on Indicator lamps without text messages The following indicator lamps signal particular functions High beams headlamp flasher 109 Fog lamps 111 Handbrake applied 63 Handbrake applied for Canadian mod els Lamp flashes DSC or DTC controls the drive and braking forces for maintaining vehicle stability 91 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 92 DE DTC Engine malfunction with deteriorating emissions levels 238 13 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Communications Entertainment v O S D i lt Driving tips AENA ELOLA v 3 V V W v o Around the center console controls and displ
181. e to vehicle driving ahead refer to page 73 72 Storing current speed Tap the lever arrow 1 or briefly pull it arrow 2 The system stores the current vehicle speed It is indicated on the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster Increasing desired speed Press or tap the lever to the resistance point or beyond arrow 1 until the desired speed is dis played The speed then displayed is stored and achieved on a clear road gt Each time the lever is tapped to the resis tance point the desired speed is increased by approx 1 mph 1 km h gt Each time the lever is tapped beyond the resistance point the desired speed increases to the next fives position in the mph speedometer display or the next tens position in the km h speedometer display Reducing desired speed Pull the lever arrow 2 until the desired speed is displayed These functions are operated in the same man ner as increasing your desired speed Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Selecting distance gt Briefly press rocker switch downward Increase distance gt Briefly press rocker switch upward Reduce distance The selected distance is displayed in the instru ment cluster Distance 1 closest Distance 2 Distance 3 Distance 4 farthest This distance is set when you acti vate the system Use good judgment to select the appro priate following distance given road con
182. e top 2 Turn the controller until the desired selec tion criterion is selected and press the con troller i FM Manual Allstations Set 7 103 5 299 3 SKLOS 697 5 7 KROQ B 100 5 3 WNYC 4943 Buttons next to CD player Press the EM button for the corresponding direction The system changes to the next displayed sta tion You can also change stations with buttons on the steering wheel refer to page 11 Sampling stations scan The system plays a brief sample from each of the stations on the current waveband 1 Select FM or AM and press the control ler Set is selected 2 Press the controller Other menu items are displayed 3 Select Scan and press the controller ql T FM y 4 Presets The stations are sampled To end sampling 1 Press the controller 2 Select Scan and press the controller This cancels sampling of the stations and the radio remains on the current station Buttons next to CD player To sample the stations press and hold the EM button for the corresponding direction To stop scanning press the button again Selecting frequency manually With Manual you can select stations that are received in addition to those displayed 1 Select FM or AM and press the control ler 2 Change into the second field from the top 3 Select Manual and press the controller 173 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG
183. e windshield and side 8 AUTO program windows 9 Switching cooling function on and off man 2 Air for the upper body region refer to Front ually ventilation on page 117 10 Temperature right side of passenger com 3 Airto footwell partment 4 Temperature left side of passenger com 11 Manual air distribution front passenger side partment 12 Maximum cooling 5 Manual air distribution driver s side 13 AUC Automatic recirculated air control Defrosting windows and removing conden recirculated air mode sation 14 LED for residual heat utilization and parked 7 Manual air volume switching off automatic car ventilation system climate control residual heat utilization 15 Rear window defroster 113 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Climate 16 Air grill for interior temperature sensor please keep clear and unobstructed The current setting for air distribution is dis played on the Control Display A congenial climate The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis tribution and air volume for virtually all condi tions refer to AUTO program below Now you only need to select an interior temperature pleasant to you The following sections contain more detailed information on the available setting options Most settings are stored for the remote control currently in use also refer to Personal Profile settings on page 29 AUTO program The AUTO program handles the L adjustment of
184. e wing nut 1 Remove the washer 2 laterally Take out the tool mounts 3 Remove the compact wheel Preparing wheel change h 2 3 Observe the safety precautions above Prevent the vehicle from rolling Place the chock behind the front wheel on the other side of the vehicle or on inclines in front of this wheel On steeply inclined roads always secure the vehicle against rolling Loosen the lug bolts a half turn Jacking up vehicle 1 Position the vehicle jack at the jacking point closest to the wheel so that the entire sur face of the jack base rests on the ground perpendicularly beneath the jacking point The vehicle jack is designed for changing wheels only Do not attempt to raise another vehicle model with it or to raise any load of any kind To do so could cause accidents and personal injury lt 250 Guide the jack head into the rectangular recess of the jacking point when cranking up refer to illustration detail Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are changing is raised from the ground Mounting a wheel i Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the wheel Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from the mounting surfaces of the wheel and hub Also clean the lug bolts Position the new wheel or compact wheel Secure the wheel by screwing at least two lug bolts into opposite bolt holes When you mount wheels other than Genu ine BMW light alloy wheels different lug bolts may also be
185. echnology the signal may fail causing interruptions in reception lt 4 Enabling or disabling channels iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller backwards to open Entertainment 3 select SAT i Presets S KL 2993 697 5 3 WNYC 7KRoQ 4943 4 Press the controller E m SAT t All channels t CH 001 Channel A CH 003 Channel C Z CH 004 Channel D CH 005 Channel E The channels are displayed w These channels are enabled B 1005 Enabling 1 Select a channel that has not yet been enabled and press the controller A telephone number and the electronic serial number ESN are displayed Dl The electronic serial number is required for enabling or disabling 4 2 To enable the channels Dial the phone number Disabling 1 Select an enabled channel and press the controller 1 Jazz sZ CHOONI Channel PACE hannel B nannel C hannel D channel E Store Tone 2 Select ESN and press the controller The electronic serial number ESN is dis played The electronic serial number is required for disabling lt 3 To disable the channels Dial the phone number 178 Onine Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG The channels of this category are displayed Select SAT and press the controller w Select a channel marked with this sym bol FM AM W
186. ectric It may only be possible to raise the glass roof The system must be initialized refer to page 42 gt Panorama glass roof It may only be possible to raise the glass roof The system must be reinitialized refer to page 44 gt Active steering The system is deactivated and must be reinitialized refer to page 98 Until then larger steering wheel movements are required gt Power windows The pinch prevention system for the power windows must be reinitialized refer to page 40 TK Talk to your BMW center before placing the stored vehicle back in service 251 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Replacing components Fuses Sports Wagon in cargo bay Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a sub EU NS stitute of another color or amperage rating as i aN this could lead to a circuit overload ultimately gt CA resulting in a fire in the vehicle lt Re 114 Sedan D Spare fuses plastic tweezers and fuse alloca tion diagram are located in the compartment for the onboard tool kit refer to page 243 1 Unhook the retaining strap refer to page 129 Sports Wagon 2 Open the right hand side panel Spare fuses and a pair of plastic tweezers are contained in the onboard tool kit refer to page 243 A fuse allocation diagram is located in the cargo bay behind the right hand side panel In glove c
187. ed and the vehicle cannot be towed Only manually release the transmission lock for towing and firmly apply the handbrake before hand so that the vehicle cannot roll Reengage the transmission lock after parking the vehicle at its destination Unlocking 1 Reach into the trim piece opening arrow 1 and firmly pull the trim piece upward arrow 2 2 Remove cover over the opening refer to 3 3 Insert a screwdriver from the onboard tool kit refer to page 243 into the opening arrow 1 ir e mur e O 4 Pullthe screwdriver toward the rear until it is heard to engage arrow 2 and leave it inserted in the opening The transmission lock is released Releasing on sport automatic transmission 1 Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever 2 Pull the sleeve over the selector lever 3 Reach into the trim piece opening arrow 1 and firmly pull the trim piece upward arrow 2 N AN a A k 4 Remove cover over the opening refer to 5 65 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG iving Dr 5 Insert a screwdriver from the onboard tool kit refer to page 243 into the opening arrow 1 6 Pullthe screwdriver toward the rear until it is heard to engage arrow 2 and leave it inserted in the opening The transmission lock is released Locking 1 Pull out the screwdriver upward The transmission lock is locked again 2 Reinstal
188. ed car ventilation blows air into the passenger compartment to lower interior tem peratures It is ready to use in the parked car mode at any outside temperature You can set two different times for the system to start The parked car ventilation can also be switched on and off directly It remains switched on for 30 minutes Since the system uses a substantial amount of electrical current you should refrain from acti vating it twice in succession without allowing the battery to be recharged in normal operation between use 117 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG The air emerges through the upper body region vent outlets in the instrument panel These vent outlets must be open for the system to operate The parked car ventilation is operated via iDrive iDrive for operating principle refer to page 1 Open the start menu Move the controller to the left to open Cli mate Select Parked car operation and press the controller Select Automatic ventilation and press the controller Select Parked car ventilation and press the controller i i a fry Parked Car operation i Automatic ventilation TY The parked car ventilation is switched on 3 The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control flashes Open the start menu Move the controller to the left to open Cli mate Select Parked car operation and press the controller Select
189. eel tire damage Please note that low profile tires cause wheels tires and suspension parts to be more suscep tible to road hazards and consequential dam ages Unusual vibrations encountered during normal vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or some other vehicle defect This can for exam ple be caused by driving over curbs These kinds of problems may also be signaled by other changes in vehicle response such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right In these cases reduce speed immedi ately and have wheels and tires thor oughly checked To do so drive carefully to the nearest BMW center or tire shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor respondingly trained personnel If necessary have the vehicle towed there Otherwise tire damage can be extremely dangerous to vehicle occupants and other road users 4 Run flat tires You will recognize run flat tires by the circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire Run flat tires consist of partially self contained tires and special rims The sidewall reinforce ment ensures that the tire retains some residual safety in the event of pressure drop and driving remains possible to a restricted degree To continue driving with a damaged tire gt With Flat Tire Monitor refer to Indication of a flat tire page 95 gt With Tire Pressure Monitor refer to Mes sage with low tire inflation pressure page 97 New wheels
190. efer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller to the right to open Navigation 3 Select Navigation and press the control ler The Control Display shows gt the arrow view or map view during destina tion guidance gt the destination list when destination guid ance is switched off 144 Entering a destination manually The system s word matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of streets or towns refer to page 155 This allows you to enter different spellings and completes your entry so that stored names can be called up quickly 1 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Navigation is selected and press the controller New destination is selected 2 Press the controller i Navicalion Tl Tel SANTA BARB ARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY Wy Route preference Arrow display 3 Select Enter address and press the con troller From address book UNITED STATES Town City Street House number Intersection The system also supports you with the follow ing features gt If you do not enter a street the system will guide you to the downtown area of a town city gt You can skip the entry of country and local ity if the current entries should be retained for your new destination Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG If
191. elect Delete and press the controller E Phone Tops Call Delete all numbers reter Adam The entry is deleted Select an entry from the list and press the controller Select Delete all numbers and press the controller ie Phone il lop B k Call Delete eter Adam Select Yes and press the controller The list is deleted If you are not enabled for BMW Assist you can have several service phone numbers displayed BMW Roadside Assistance when you require breakdown assistance BMW center e g when you want to make an appointment for service BMW Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle If BMW Assist is enabled refer to page 2 203 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG You can dial the displayed service phone num bers if your mobile phone is paired in the vehi cle iDrive for operating principle refer to page Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Move the controller forward to select Communication Select BMW Contact and press the con troller Phone i BMW Contact Numbers Roadside Assistance Service Request Customer Relations Select BMW Contact Numbers and press the controller BMW Contact i Roadside Assistante Service Request Customer Relations Select one of the following menu items and press the controller Roadside Assistance Customer Relations Servic
192. election criteria gt All stations Stations that can currently be received in the FM waveband gt Autostore The stations with the strongest received signals in the AM waveband gt Presets Stations you have previously stored refer to page 174 gt Manual To set stations that can be received in addi tion to those displayed refer to Selecting frequency manually on page 173 Business radio You can choose from the following selection criteria gt Autostore For the Station with the strongest signal refer to page 174 gt Presets Stations you have previously stored refer to page 174 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG gt Manual To set stations that can be received in addi tion to those displayed refer to Selecting frequency manually on page 173 Changing selection criteria In addition to the stations currently displayed you can have stations with another selection criterion displayed You can choose from the following selection criteria gt All stations Stations that can currently be received in the FM waveband gt Autostore The stations with the strongest received signals in the AM waveband gt Presets Stations you have previously stored refer to page 174 gt Manual To set stations that can be received in addi tion to those displayed refer to Selecting frequency manually on page 173 1 Change into the second field from th
193. elete all entries Delete phone book deletes all entries in the phone book nf 1 Delete phone book The dialog for deleting phone book is opened 2 Confirm the prompt with Yest 3 Confirm the repeated prompt with Yesi Have entries read aloud and select You can have all the entries of your voice phone book read aloud in the order of input and select a certain entry to establish a connection nf 1 Read phone book The dialog for reading phone book is opened 2 Dialnumber lt when the desired entry is read aloud Selecting an entry The connection to the phone number of the selected entry is established wr 1 Dialnamet The dialog for selecting an entry is opened 2 Say the name when prompted 3 Confirm the prompt with Yest Redialing The Redial command calls Redial Notes Important for voice commands For voice commands keep the following in mind gt Issue the commands smoothly and at nor mal volume avoiding excessive emphasis and pauses Keep the doors windows and glass sunroof closed to prevent interference from ambi ent noise Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking Snap in adapter inserting removing hy Press the area 1 around the button and remove the cover 207 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG pur aS e O Telephoning 2 Insert the snap in ada
194. ement of the pedals and impair their operation 4 Corrosion on brake rotors When the vehicle is driven only occasionally during extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all and in operating conditions where brake applications are less frequent there is an increased tendency for corrosion to form on rotors while contaminants accumulate on the brake pads This occurs because the minimum pressure which must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the rotors is not reached Should corrosion form on the brake rotors the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that even extended application will fail to cure When vehicle is parked Condensation forms in the air conditioner sys tem during operation and then exits under the vehicle Traces of condensed water under the vehicle are therefore normal Before driving into a car wash Fold in the exterior mirrors refer to page 53 otherwise they could be damaged due to the width of the vehicle Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG You can find valuable information on this topic under Care starting on page 239 528xi 535xi FN Avoid car washes with guide rail heights over 4 in 10 cm otherwise there is dan ger of damaging chassis parts 4 Rear window wiper The rear window wiper can be damaged in car washes Take appropriate protective measures ask the car wash operator if necessary Automatic and sport
195. en stopped on a level surface with the engine running and approx 5 minutes while driv Ing If the engine oil has been topped off the measurement of the oil level can take up to 30 minutes Oil level at the minimum Refill with 1 quart of engine oil Add a maximum of 1 US quart liter of engine oil at the next opportunity refer to Adding engine oil below Add at least 0 5 US quart liter of oil otherwise the oil level check cannot reliably display the new oil level If the oil level displayed is below minimum add engine oil immediately Failure to do so may lead to engine damage Engine oil level too high Have the vehicle checked immedi ately otherwise engine damage may result if too much oil has been added lt 4 Please observe recalculated service inter val for engine oil Do not add engine oil Before continuing to drive note the recalculated remaining mile age until the next oil change service refer to Service requirements on page 81 Have the system checked as soon as possible Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Adding engine oil a WP Do not add 1 US quart liter of oil until a corre sponding message is shown on the Control Dis play Add oil within the next 125 miles 200 km otherwise the engine could be dam aged 4 Continuous exposure to used oil has caused cancer in laboratory testing For this reason any skin areas that come into contact with oil sho
196. en the window with the roller sun blind deployed Otherwise there is a risk of damage and injury at higher speeds lt Glove compartment Opening Pull the handle The light in the glove compart ment switches on To prevent injury in the event of an acci dent while the vehicle is being driven close the glove compartment immediately after use Closing Raise the lid into the closed position Locking Lock with a key DS If you only hand over the remote control without the integrated key e g for valet parking refer to page 28 the glove compart ment cannot be unlocked 4 122 Flashlight On the left side of the glove compartment ina holder a 5 Insert the flashlight with the lens pointing into the passenger compartment in order to prevent it from being inadvertently switched on lt 4 Center armrest front The compartment in the center armrest is divided into two sections Opening cover Press the button The cover opens somewhat and can be folded upwards Depending on vehicle equipment the upper section contains a compartment with a mat that can be removed for cleaning or a telephone cra dle Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Opening upper compartment Press button and fold cover upward Accessing lower compartment Press the button at the front and fold the upper compartment or the telephone cradle upward Ventilating lower compartment
197. equires specially adapted mainte nance and repair methods Therefore have cor responding work on your BMW performed only by your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor respondingly trained personnel If this work is not carried out properly there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety haz ards 4 5 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Notes Parts and accessories For your own safety use genuine parts EN and accessories approved by BMW When you purchase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accesso ries not approved by BMW BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used ona BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi cle its operation or its occupants Genuine BMW Parts BMW Accessories and other products approved by BMW together with professional advice on using these items are available from all BMW centers Installation and operation of non BMW approved accessories such as alarms radios amplifiers radar detectors wheels suspension components brake dust shields
198. er arrow 4 The system sprays washer fluid against the windshield and activates the wipers for a brief period With the vehicle lighting switched on the head lamps and the BMW Night Vision camera are also cleaned simultaneously at suitable inter vals Do not use the washing mechanisms if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield If you do so your vision could be obscured To avoid freezing use a washer fluid antifreeze refer to Washer fluid Do not use washing mechanisms when the washer fluid reservoir is empty otherwise you will damage the washer pump 4 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are heated when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on Sports Wagon Rear window wiper 1 Intermittent mode When reverse gear is engaged continuous operation is switched on automatically 2 Cleaning the rear window Do not use washing mechanisms when the washer fluid reservoir is empty other wise you will damage the washer pump 4 Washer fluid Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable For this reason keep it away from ignition sources and store only in the closed original container out of reach of children Otherwise there is the danger of bodily injury Always observe the instructions for use provided on the containers lt 4 Filler neck for washer fluid Only add washer fluid with the engin
199. erage speed VV FF vv Average fuel consumption Starting or stopping the trip computer or reset ting all values 1 Select Set and press the controller 2 Select the desired menu item 3 Press the controller Display options You can display the computer or the trip com puter in the assistance window 1 Move the controller to the right to change to the assistance window and press the con troller Mage cle eal Aria U Ferpoctiuye Aare ep u f Current goiit avi Lure NE Tee n and ntr y 1043 Hi i Boa jit CEE ia 2 Select Onboard info or Trip computer 3 Press the controller i w M ngation eee Pet New destinatian MARINA DEL REY AUMIRALIY WA SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST w AID PM Cheque tise 540 hr Curation 29 mie irasai Route preference Arrow cliplay Service requirements of mls 5300 10 2008 The remaining driving distance and the date for the next maintenance are displayed briefly with the ignition switched on Your BMW Service Advisor can deter Db mine your vehicle s current service requirements by reading out the data stored in the remote control 4 Additional information You can select a display of more detailed infor mation on the maintenance scope on the Con trol Display For operating principle refer to page 16 1 Open the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the menu 3 Select Info sources and press the control ler
200. erent tem perature settings in rapid succession the automatic climate control does not have suffi cient time to adjust the set temperature 4 In the highest setting you activate the maximum heating output regardless of the outside tem perature Adjusting temperature in upper body region 1 Press the button to display the current set ting on the Control Display 2 Select the field by moving the controller and turning the controller to adjust the temper ature Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG f Automatic programs O soft CO medium Iw intensive You can also adjust the temperature in the upper body region with iDrive iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Open the start menu 2 Open Climate Select Vent settings and press the con troller 4 Select the field by moving the controller and turning the controller to adjust the temper ature 3 Ventsettings Drivel Defrosting windows and removing condensation Quickly remove ice and condensa ag tion from the windshield and front side windows To do this also switch on the cooling function Rear window defroster The rear window defroster CA switches off after a while Depend ing on the vehicle equipment upper wires are used as an antenna and are not part of the rear window defroster Air volume manual a You can adjust the air volume by L N turning You can reactivate t
201. ering the short range sensors When doing so be particularly careful in removing layers of snow and ice Do not apply adhesive labels etc in the area of the short range sensors If the sensor is not aligned properly e g due to damage the active cruise control cannot be activated v i O E As with conventional cruise control sys tems active cruise control in no way diminishes or substitutes for the driver s own personal responsibility alertness and aware ness in adjusting speed braking or otherwise controlling the vehicle The driver should decide when to use the system on the basis of road traffic visibility and weather conditions Active cruise control is intended for use on highway type roadways where traffic is moving relatively smoothly Do not use this system in city driving in complex driving situations on curvy winding roads slippery roads or roads with sharp curves such as highway off ramps during inclement weather such as snow strong rain or fog or when entering interchanges ser vice parking areas or toll booths It is also important to regulate your vehicle s speed and distance setting within applicable legal limits Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if necessary especially when the sys tem is actively following a vehicle in front of you 4 A Always remember that the range and abil ity of the system do have physical limita tions For example
202. ers In these situations the system may interpret the above conditions as a vehicle ahead requir ing aswitch to low beams When the conditions return to normal the system will reactivate the high beams The high beam assistant cannot replace the driver s responsibility for complying with state laws on high beam switching or for adapting to visibility and traffic conditions Switching off via iDrive iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Lighting is selected and press the controller Door locks FTM k O Triple turn signal O Daytime running lamps Pathway lighting 240s O High beam assistant O Welcome light 6 Select High beam assistant and press the controller O High beam assistant is switched off The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Fog lamps 1 ty 4 gt nt ee The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on for the fog lamps to operate The green indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up whenever the fog lamps are on The fog lamps are switched off whenever the high beams are switched on gt If the auto
203. ers connect the USB device to the connection 1 After connecting for the first time the informa tion of all tracks e g artist music genre and the playback lists of the USB device are trans ferred to the vehicle This process can take some time The time required is dependent on the USB device and on the number of tracks During the transfer you can select the tracks via the directories and file names Following the transfer you can call up the tracks via the information and playback lists The information of up to four USB devices can be stored in the vehicle for a total of approx 20 000 tracks If a fifth USB device is connected the informa tion of the tracks of the first USB device stored in the vehicle is deleted Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management DRM cannot be played 4 Starting audio playback Via iDrive If the audio device has a device name this will be displayed if possible 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller backwards to open Entertainment 3 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until AUX is selected and press the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG WE SAI CD AUX IN dsi External audio source Select USB or the name of the audio device and press the controller i m AJIJ P AUX IN External audio source The playback starts with the first track You can
204. es into the vehicle and have them displayed gt BMW TeleServices The data on the service status of your vehi cle or on required inspections are transmit ted to your BMW center either automati cally prior to the due date or when you request a BMW service appointment gt Remote door unlock Inform the BMW Assist Response Center e g if your remote controlis not available and you want to have the vehicle unlocked m c O E E O O gt Stolen vehicle recovery After your vehicle has been reported to the police as stolen the BMW Assist Response Center can locate its position In addition you can be provided with other ser vices e g the concierge service or information on route planning traffic conditions and the weather With Critical Calling you can make a limited number of calls via the BMW Assist Response Center e g if you do not have your mobile phone with you 209 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG BMW Assist Press the SOS button to contact the BMW Assist Response Center see below You also have access to the BMW Assist con cierge service via the Internet Characteristics of the offered services The following characteristics apply to the ser vices gt The offered services are country specific gt Voice contact is established or data are transmitted depending on the equipment and the country In some countries it is possible to do b
205. ess the controller Fast forward reverse Buttons next to CD player Press and hold the button for the corre sponding direction Notes Do not subject the audio device to EN extreme environmental conditions e g extremely high temperatures refer to the oper ating instructions of the audio device Other wise the audio device can be damaged andthe resulting distraction can reduce road safety while driving 4 Depending on the configuration of the audio files e g bit rates greater than 256 Kbit s proper playback cannot always be ensured Connecting instructions gt The USB audio interface supplies the con nected audio device with power provided the audio device supports this function It is therefore unnecessary to connect the audio device to a socket in the vehicle during operation gt Do not force the plug into the USB interface gt Do not connect any devices e g fans or lamps to the USB audio interface gt Do not connect USB hard disks gt Do not use the audio interface to recharge external devices 190 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG ooue 6 ely 01 U04 sdi Bulang uoljeBiaAenN JUBWUIeVa UQ SuONeDIUNWIWOD AIO Pre 191 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMWAG am a i Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Telephoning
206. estraint will perform its protective function and it is not possible to take advantage of its injury reducing potential in the event of a rear end collision Have the active head restraints reset after they are triggered in a rear end collision Only have this work carried out by a BMW center ora workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per sonnel Otherwise this safety equipment will not function properly 4 Please contact a BMW center if you wish to have the front head restraints removed and installed lt Front seats height adjustment has i O Front seats adjusting distance to the back of the head ta gt Forward pull up gt Back push the button and slide the head rest cushion toward the rear Do not place any objects behind the headrest cushion Otherwise you can impair the proper function of the head restraint 4 Comfort seat You can adjust the distance to the back of the head with the shoulder support refer to page 46 49 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Adjusting Adjusting side extensions You can fold the side extensions on the head restraint forward for increased lateral support in the resting position Rear seats height adjustment gt To raise pull up gt To lower press the button arrow 1 and push the head restraint downward Removing 1 Pull the head restraint
207. etween analog and digital reception This can result in repetitions or inter ruptions In this case it may be advisable to deactivate digital radio reception Many stations transmit both analog and digital signals You can receive these stations digitally and with improved sound quality A digital radio network must be available in order to receive digital stations Some stations transmit several programs To select one of these programs a a Select FM or AM and press the control iDrive for operating principle refer to page ler Press the MENU button ce This opens the start menu JAM WE SAT CD AUX Press the controller to open the j menu Manual Turn the controller until Settings is Set selected and press the controller Select Audio and press the controller AR OO 92 94 46 gA 100 162 704 106 108 100 1 O Select Manual and press the controller Change to upper field Turn the controller until HD radio is selected and press the controller Treble Bass Balance P i Select a station that is received digitally H This symbol is displayed when a station IS being received digitally Switch to the next program of the digital station with the J buttons on the radio or the steering wheel You can store a station refer to page 1 176 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG If you are on a longer journey and leave the transmission range ofthe stations originall
208. f up to approx 200 W at 12 V Avoid damaging the socket due to inserting plugs of different shapes or sizes The same is true for all power outlets in the vehicle In front passenger footwell ha ES O Access to socket Fold open the cover Sedan In cargo bay Access to socket Fold open the cover Sports Wagon In cargo bay Access to socket Fold open the cover 125 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG ior accessories Practical inter In rear center console Sedan Through loading system Opening 1 Release the buckle of the center seat belt in the rear seat using the latch plate of one of Q Qo the other safety belts Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt into the socket pro vided for it on the rear window shelf Depending on the equipment the sockets in the rear are covered with caps or equipped with a lighter Refer to Cigarette lighter front page 124 _ Access to socket Remove respective cap or lighter 3 To release the rear backrest pull the corre sponding lever in the cargo bay Center armrest ee 2 Push the corresponding head restraint down as far as it will go refer to page 50 enr tre Storage tray Pull the cover upward arrow 1 Access to cup holders Press button 2 and open the cover 4 The unlocked rear backrest moves forward slightly Fold the backrest forward by the head rest
209. farther away are already shown there before a Signal tone sounds The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 89 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Technology for comfort convenience and safety 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu Display oip lt gt Info sources Audio Display settings Steering wheel buttons Vehicle Tires Language Units Time Date 3 Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller 4 Turn the controller until Vehicle Tires is selected and press the controller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until PDC is selected and press the controller a FT Lighting Door Ic IV PRG display on j Tay E a I ol 6 Select PDC display on and press the con troller k The PDC screen is activated The display appears on the Control Display as soon as PDC is activated System limits Even with PDC final responsibility for estimating the distance between the vehicle and any obstructions always remains with the driver Even when sensors are pro vided there is a blind spot in which objects can no longer be detected The system is also sub ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms of ultrasonic measurement such as those encountered with tow bars and t
210. fer to Check Control 83 Manual air distribution 115 Manual in radio mode 173 Manual operation door lock 32 driver s door 32 fuel filler door 220 glass sunroof 42 luggage compartment lid 34 panorama glass sunroof 44 transmission lock automatic transmission 65 Manual transmission 63 Map direction of travel 158 Map display 158 Map facing north 158 Map for navigation changing scale 158 destination entry 148 Map view facing north 158 Master key refer to Keys remote control 28 Maximum cooling 116 280 Maximum speed with compact wheel 251 with winter tires 230 Measurements refer to Dimensions 261 Memory refer to Seat mirror and steering wheel memory 47 MENU button refer to Start menu 17 Menus refer to iDrive 16 Message list for traffic information 161 Microfilter 117 Microphone for mobile phone 14 for voice command system 14 Mirror dimming feature 54 Mirrors 53 automatic curb monitor 53 folding in and out 53 heating 53 memory refer to Seat mirror and steering wheel memory 47 Missed calls 202 Missed calls 203 Mobile phone accepted calls 203 adjusting volume 200 calling 201 ending call 201 installation location refer to Center armrest 122 missed calls 203 operation by voice 205 operation via iDrive 200 redialing 203 refer to separate operating instru
211. fingerprints dust scratches and mois ture Store CDs DVDs in a sleeve Do not subject CDs DVDs to temperatures over 122 F 50 C high levels of humidity or direct sunlight CDs DVDs with copy protection CDs DVDs are often provided with a copy pro tection feature by the manufacturer This can mean that some CDs DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent Care If necessary clean the reflective scanning side of the CDs DVDs with a commercially available cleaning cloth by wiping in straight lines from the center outward Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG AUX In connection You can connect an external audio device e g an MP3 player and play the sound via the vehi cle speakers The sound can be adjusted via iDrive Connecting 1 Connection for audio playback 1 8 in 3 5 mm jack plug To play audio tracks through the vehicle s speaker system connect the headset or line out port of the external device to connection 1 Starting audio playback The audio device must be switched on Via iDrive iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller backwards to open Entertainment 3 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until AUX is selected and press the controller EM AM WB SAI CD O AUX IN USE Set External audio source 4 Select AUX IN a
212. flation pressure 223 224 wheel change 250 Compartment for remote control refer to Ignition lock 61 Compartments in cargo bay Sports Wagon 128 refer to Storage area package Sports Wagon 129 refer to Storage compartments 123 Compressed audio files 181 Computer 79 displays on Control Display 80 hour signal 87 Concert hall Tone control 171 Concierge 213 Concierge service 212 Condensation refer to When vehicle is parked 136 Condition Based Service CBS 237 Confirmation 31 Confirmation signals for locking and unlocking 31 Connecting car vacuum cleaner refer to Connecting electrical devices 125 Consumption refer to Average fuel consumption 80 Consumption indicator Energy Control 79 Consumption statistics refer to Average fuel consumption 80 Continue guidance to destination 157 Contrast with BMW Night Vision 105 Control Center refer to iDrive 16 274 Control Display refer to iDrive 16 setting brightness 87 switching off on 21 Controller refer to iDrive 16 Controls refer to Cockpit 10 Convenient operation glass sunroof 30 windows 30 windows and glass sunroof with comfort access 39 Coolant 235 checking level 235 temperature 78 Cooling maximum 116 Cooling fluid refer to Coolant 235 Cooling function automatic climate control 116 Cooling system refer to Coolant 235 Copyright 2 Cornering Brake Control
213. for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Thinking ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking To do so maintain the appropriate distance from the vehicle in front of you An anticipatory and smooth driving style reduces fuel con sumption Avoiding high engine speeds Use 1st gear only for starting off Accelerate rapidly in 2nd gear and above Avoid high engine speeds in doing so and shift into the next gear early When you have reached the desired speed shift into the highest possible gear and drive with the lowest possible engine speed while maintaining a constant a vehicle speed In general driving at a low engine speed reduces fuel consumption and minimizes wear Taking advantage of coasting When approaching a red light let off the gas and allow the vehicle to coast to a stop in the highest possible gear On steep roadways let off the gas and allow the vehicle to roll in the appropriate gear The flow of fuel is interrupted when coasting Switching off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine at longer stops such as traffic signals railroad crossings or in traffic jams Even having the engine switched off for approx 4 seconds results in fuel savings Switching off functions currently not required Functions such as air conditioning seat heat ing or rear window defrosting consume a lot of energy and require additional fuel Their influ ence is particularly pronoun
214. for cups 124 Home address in navigation 153 Homepage of BMW 4 Hood 232 278 Hooks for shopping bags Sports Wagon 129 Horn 10 Hotel function refer to Locking separately 34 Hot exhaust system 135 Hour memo 87 House number in destination entry 146 Hydraulic brake assistant refer to Brake assistant 90 Hydroplaning 135 IBOC refer to High Definition Radio 176 Ice refer to Outside temperature warning 78 ID3 tag refer to Information on track 183 Identification mark recommended tire brands 230 run flat tires 229 tire coding 227 iDrive 16 assistance window 20 automatic climate control with expanded scope 114 changing date and time 86 changing language 88 changing menu page 19 changing settings 86 changing units of measure and display type 88 confirming selection or entry 19 controller 16 controls 16 displays menus 17 operating principle 17 selecting menu item 19 setting brightness 87 start menu 17 status information 20 symbols 18 Ignition 61 switched off 62 switched on 61 Ignition key refer to Keys remote control 28 Ignition key position 1 refer to Radio readiness 61 Ignition key position 2 refer to Ignition on 61 Ignition lock 61 Starting engine with comfort access 39 i menu 17 Imprint 2 Indicator warning lamps ABS Antilock Brake System 93 active steeri
215. for the planned route S Vehicle Tires _ Select the A symbol and press the controller Language Units Time Date Turn the controller until Traffic Info set tings is selected and press the controller v settings i Vehicle Tires Language Units Time Date During destination guidance the traffic infor mation on the planned route is marked with a yellow diamond BMW Service settings Bluetooth Select Traffic Info and press the control ler t Traffic info AUTO LOCAL 1 KBIG 104 First the traffic information along the planned LOCAL 1 route is shown sorted according to the distance to the current vehicle position Er The traffic information can be received and displayed Open the start menu AUTO automatic selection of the Traffic Info Move the controller to the right to open station with the strongest reception Navigation gt Depending on the station either the sta tion name frequency local number or other information is displayed lt 161 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG ion guidance Destinat 3 Select Traffic Info and press the control Symbols for traffic information ler o Traffic event with map scales greater 4 book Information tan miesi km arrow ponis n the direction of travel concerned US 3 SOUTHBOUND 3 8 mis Several traffic events have been US 9 NORTHBOUND 49 mis received Select a smal
216. g Switching on After parking the vehicle press the lever up or down beyond the resistance point arrow 3 m The roadside parking lamps drain the bat tery Do not leave them switched on for long periods of time otherwise it may no longer be possible to start the engine 4 Switching off Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction up to the resistance point arrow 3 High beam assistant The concept This system automatically switches the high beams on and off A sensor on the front side of the inside rearview mirror controls the process The assistant makes sure that the high beams are switched on whenever traffic conditions permit This relieves you of the burden of con stantly switching back and forth and simulta neously provides you with the best possible vis ibility Naturally you can intervene at any time to switch the high beams on and off as usual Activating system 1 Turn the light switch to position 3 refer to page 107 2 With the low beams switched on briefly press the turn signal lever in the high beam direction ZA The indicator lamp in the instrument 4 cluster lights up when the high beam assistant is activated The system automatically switches between high beams 109 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG v i O Lamps and low beams reacting to oncoming traffic vehicles ahead of you and sufficiently lit areas e g in b
217. g in the center position Damage to safety belts When subjected to strain due to an acci dent or in the event of damage replace the safety belts the belt tensioners and any child restraint systems and have the belt anchor points checked Only have this work carried out at a BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor respondingly trained personnel Otherwise cor rect operation of this safety equipment is not guaranteed 4 Seat heating Front The appearance and arrangement of the but tons may vary depending on the equipment 1 Seat heating three LEDs 2 Seat heating one LED 3 Seat heating with active seat ventilation Press the respective button once per tempera ture level The temperature level is shown on the Control Display with buttons 2 and 3 The maximum temperature is supplied when three LEDs are lit The temperature is reduced and if need be the heating is switched off in order to reduce the load on the battery The LEDs remain lit To switch off press button longer Temperature distribution without active seat ventilation The heat output can be distributed variously in the seat cushion and the backrest ir e mur e O iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Open the start menu 2 Move the controller to the left to open Cli mate 3 Select Seat heater distribution and press the controller
218. gate Convenient operation You also have the option of operating the win dows and the glass sunroof from the driver s door lock Turn and hold the key in the positions for unlocking or locking Watch during the closing process to be sure that no one is injured Releasing the key stops the operation 4 Manual operation In the event of an electrical malfunction you can turn a key all the way to the right or left in the door lock to lock or unlock the driver s door Opening and closing from inside This button serves to unlock or lock doors and the luggage compartment lid or tailgate and rear window with the front doors closed but does not activate the anti theft system The fuel filler door remains unlocked Automatic locking iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 3 Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Door locks is selected and press the controller 6 Select Central locking and press the con troller yA Door locks Unlock button All doors Last seat pos After door opened O Relock door if not opened F7 Lock after driving 7 Select a menuitem gt Relock door if not opened The centr
219. gate will open slightly regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked D During opening the tailgate pivots back and up Make sure that adequate clear ance is available before opening To prevent accidentally locking yourself out never lay the remote control in the cargo bay A previously locked tailgate is also locked again after closing When opening the tailgate the roll up cover is raised 4 If pointed or sharp edged objects could strike the rear window while driving be sure to provide protection around all edges Failure to do so could result in damage to the heating conductors of the rear window 4 Confirmation signals You can activate or deactivate the confirmation signals ir e mur e O 1 Open the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Door locks is selected and press the controller 6 Select Confirmation and press the con troller v Door locks 11 Central locking RY Flash when locking EY Flash when unlocking O Acoustic confirm when locking O Acoustic confirm when unlocking 7 Select the desired signal 8 Press the controller The signal is activated Malfunction The remote control may malfunction due to local radio waves Should the remote
220. grated universal remote control three times The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand held transmitter gt If you have any additional questions please contact your BMW center lt 4 Deleting all stored programs Press the left and right hand memory button 1 for approx 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes quickly All stored programs are deleted Individual programs cannot be deleted di i O Rememorizing individual programs 1 Hold the original handheld remote control approx 4 in 10 cm to 12 in 30 cm away from the memory buttons 1 m The required distance between the hand held transmitter and the mem ory buttons 1 depends on the relevant sys tem of the original hand held transmitter used lt 2 Press the desired memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote 3 Ifthe LED 2 flashes slowly after approx 20 seconds press the command button of the original hand held transmitter As soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly release both buttons If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx 15 seconds alter the distance and repeat the step Sun blinds Sun blind for rear window Press the button on the driver s door 121 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG ior accessories Practical inter Sun blinds for rear side windows Pull the loop of the roller sun blind and hook onto bracket Do not op
221. h as Park Distance Control sensors or radar sen sors should be kept clean and free of ice to maintain their full function lt Interior care Upholstery materials cloth covered paneling Clean regularly with a vacuum cleaner in order to remove surface dirt In the event of more serious soiling such as bev erage stains use a soft sponge or a lint free microfiber cloth in combination with suitable interior cleaners Follow the instructions on the packaging gt Clean upholstery material over a large area extending out to the seams Avoid intense friction 4 Open Velcro fasteners on pants or other items of clothing can cause damage to the seat covering Make sure that the Velcro fasteners are closed lt 4 Leather leather covered paneling Tr The leather used by BMW is a high quality gt natural product Slight patterns in the grain are part of the typical properties of a natu ral leather lt 4 Dust and dirt from the road chafe in pores and folds and result in considerable wear and cause the leather surface to become prematurely brit tle We therefore suggest that you clean the leather with a dust cloth or vacuum cleaner at regular intervals Particularly with light colored leather make sure to clean it regularly since it has a greater tendency to become soiled Treat the leather twice a year with a leather lotion since dirt and grease harm the protective layer of the leather Carpets luggage c
222. h is in position 2 or 3 The daytime running lamps have already been switched off at the same time as the ignition For this reason switch on the side marker lamps as needed switch position 1 otherwise the vehicle is not lit Parking lamps In switch position 1 the front rear and side vehicle lighting is switched on You can use the parking lamps for parking gt The parking lamps drain the battery Do not leave them switched on for long peri ods of time otherwise it may no longer be pos sible to start the engine It is preferable to switch on the roadside parking lamps on one side refer to page 109 4 Low beams The low beams light up when the light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is on Automatic headlamp control In switch position 3 the system activates the low beams and switches them on or off in response to changes in ambient light condi tions for instance in a tunnel at dawn and dusk and in case of precipitation Adaptive Head Light is active The LED next to the symbol lights up when the low beams are on You can activate the daytime running lamps refer to page 108 In the above mentioned situations the system then switches to the low beams ha i O A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on gt The low beams remain switched on inde pendent of the ambient lighting condi tions when you switch on the fog lamps 4 The
223. he i Y automatic mode for the air volume ees with the AUTO button The air quantity is reduced and if need be the ventilation is switched off in order to reduce the load on the battery The display stays the same Manual air distribution You can route the air flowing out into the vehicle interior via various programs separately for the driver s and passenger s side ha io ES O gt Upper body region Upper body region and footwell Footwell Driver s side windows and footwell VV OV V Individual program Selecting program mur Press the button repeatedly until i fi the desired air distribution of the VaN A respective program is shown on the Control Display Adjusting air distribution individually individual program Your settings are stored in this program iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 Open the start menu 2 Open Climate 3 Select Vent settings and press the con troller The driver s and front passenger side can be adjusted separately with the fields on the right or left side 4 Select the driver s or front passenger side if necessary Move the controller to the right or left repeatedly until the driver s or front passen ger side is selected 5 Select the desired field by moving the con troller 115 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Climate 6 Turnthe controller to adjust the air distribu tion
224. he driver can decide which actions are appropriate and then react accordingly A certain area in front of the vehicle is viewed by an infrared camera and a generated image is shown on the Control Display The resulting thermal image shows the relative heat radiation of the objects present in the camera s field of view Warmer objects appear brighter and cooler objects appear darker Contrast is dependent on the temperature difference between the objects and the background and on the amount of heat radiation of the object itself As a result it is quite possible that a per son is not continually recognizable as a person in shape since the thermal radiation can be affected by different clothing which blocks heat loss Objects with little temperature difference to the surrounding area or little heat radiation are less noticeable for example in cold weather Any improvement in detection depends on many factors such as the object size and tem perature compared to the surroundings or other nearby objects the visual recognition skills of the driver weather conditions and other factors Driving hints With the system active periodically but briefly glance at the thermal image on the Control Dis play to notice objects that could be people or larger animals The glance should be similar to glancing at the rear view mirror Do not stare at the image for long periods while driving as this will remove attention from the road If you n
225. he following gt Should a short delay occur when opening or closing the windows or the glass sun roof the system is checking whether a remote control is located in the vehicle Please repeat opening or closing if necessary 4 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Unlocking JS Grasp a door handle fully refer to arrow 1 but do not touch the surfaces arrow 2 or 3 when doing so This corresponds to pressing the button Locking gt On the driver s door touch the highlighted surface arrow 2 with a finger for approx 1 second but do not grasp the door handle gt On the remaining doors touch the high lighted surface arrow 3 with the back of your hand for approx 1 second but do not grasp the door handle This corresponds to pressing the LOCK but ton gt Please make sure that the ignition and all electronic systems consumers are switched off before locking to save the bat tery lt Comfort closing Hold a finger or the back of your hand against the surface arrow 2 or 3 but do not grasp the door handle while doing so The windows and the glass sunroof are closed Watch during the closing process to be EN sure that no one is injured Removing the hand from the door handle stops the closing process immediately Opening luggage compartment lid tailgate separately Press the button on the luggage compartment lid tailgate This corresponds to pressing th
226. he ignition lock This function is useful for example in automatic car washes refer to page 62 lt 4 D Drive automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation All for ward gears are available Kick down Kick down enables you to achieve maximum performance Press the accelerator pedal beyond the increased resistance at full throttle Sport program and manual mode M S Press selector lever toward the left from trans mission position D The sport program is activated and DS is dis played in the instrument cluster with the sport automatic transmission also S1 to S6 This position is recommended for a performance oriented driving style Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG When the selector lever is pressed forward or back the manual mode is activated and the Steptronic shifts the gear The instrument clus ter shows M1 through M6 Upshifts and downshifts are only carried out at a suitable engine and vehicle speed e g a down shift is not carried out at excessively high engine speeds The selected gear is briefly dis played in the instrument cluster followed by the Current gear To resume automatic mode press the selector lever to the right Manually unlocking and locking transmission lock In case of a power failure e g when the battery is drained or disconnected or an electrical fault manually release the transmission lock as oth erwise the rear wheels are block
227. here It will always be the driver s responsibility to drive ata speed and in a manner that recognizes potential hazards and adjust accordingly BMW Night Vision is not a substitute or replace ment for the driver s responsibility to adapt to visibility and traffic conditions The forward view illuminated by the headlamps must always be the basis for making safe driving decisions oth erwise a safety risk will result lt Activating BMW Night Vision 1 Turn the light switch to position 2 or 3 refer to page 107 2 With low beams switched on gt Press the button Depending on the vehicle s equipment the location of the button may differ somewhat FA gt gt Press one of the programmable buttons on the steering wheel refer to page 54 The image will be displayed on the Control Dis play after a few seconds Depending on the last mode selected either the normal or full screen image will be displayed 104 Due to the system s need to adjust periodically a still image is displayed at certain intervals for fractions of a second This is normal and not an indication of a problem To prevent driving without headlamps at a speed of more than approx 3 mph 5 km h and when dark the thermal image on the Control Display is only shown when the low beams are on Deactivating BMW Night Vision gt Press the button gt Press the button on the steering wheel gt Press the MENU button gt Via iDri
228. ht hand retaining strap e g to open the side panel To unhook at the rear end pull downward to hook in press it into the opening In addition it can also be secured in the center This makes it possible to secure objects of different sizes Hooks Two hooks can be used to secure smaller objects Press at bottom and fold out until they lock Compartments in floor LL e mur e O Front compartment To open the flap pull upward on the handle To close the flap press downward until it locks Rear compartment To open reach into the recess and swing up the handle The rear flap can be locked Dividing up rear compartment Fold out the partitions and press down Use the partition net refer to page 128 Otherwise objects could be thrown around and endanger occupants e g during braking or evasive maneuvers lt 4 Ski bag The ski bag is designed for safe clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snow boards With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length of up to 6 9 ft 2 10 m When skis of 6 9 ft 2 10 m in length are loaded the ski bag will tend to con tract reducing its overall capacity 129 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG ior accessories Practical inter Loading 1 Fold down the center armrest press the button and open the cover 2 Press the button again the cover in the cargo bay opens If you press the butt
229. ies Practical inter Cup holders Use lightweight unbreakable containers and do not transport hot beverages Oth erwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident Do not force containers that are too large into the cup holders other wise damage could result lt 4 Opening i gt Briefly press the button Closing Press the cover in the center and push in the cup holder Ashtray front Opening Briefly press the center of the cover 124 Emptying Press the button refer to arrow The ashtray rises and can be removed Cigarette lighter front Press in the lighter with the engine running or the ignition switched on The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by the knob only Holding or touching it in other areas could result in burns Always take along the remote control when you leave the vehicle otherwise children could for example use the lighter and burn themselves 4 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Ashtray rear Emptying Press the entire cover down The ashtray rises and can be removed Cigarette lighter rear Refer to Cigarette lighter front Connecting electrical devices Sockets With the engine running or the ignition switched on the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a power outlet for hand flashlights car vacuum cleaners etc with power ratings o
230. ies may result i The handle recesses on the interior trim of the luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull down Emergency release Pull the lever in the cargo bay The luggage compartment lid is unlocked Sports Wagon opening and closing rear window Small items can be loaded and unloaded quickly when the rear window is opened sepa rately Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Press the button the rear window opens some what It can be swung upward Press the window closed to close gt When opening the rear window the roll up cover is raised 4 If pointed or sharp edged objects could d strike the rear window while driving be sure to provide protection around all edges Failure to do so could result in damage to the heating conductors of the rear window 4 Automatic roll up cover When opening the rear window the roll up cover is raised and when the rear window is closed it is lowered T Make sure that the closing area of the roll up cover is clear of obstructions other wise the payload or the roll up cover may be damaged lt 4 Details on the roll up cover are provided on page 127 Sports Wagon tailgate Opening from inside r Press button 1 or button 2 the tailgate opens unless it has been locked Opening from outside a e mur e O Press the button on the tailgate or the Ej but ton on the remote control for ap
231. ile phone gt Press the button above the storage compartment Changing over may take sev eral seconds From hands free system to mobile phone When you telephone via the hands free system you can also continue the call via the mobile phone if necessary depending on the mobile phone model Act according to what is shown on the mobile phone display refer to the oper ating instructions of your mobile phone As an alternative you can deactivate the Blue tooth link Depending on your mobile phone model poor reception of the wireless communications net work can result in the system changing from the hands free system to the mobile phone Operation by voice The concept You can operate your mobile phone without having to remove your hands from the steering wheel When making your entries you will be supported by announcements or questions in many cases The same prerequisites as for operation via iDrive apply refer to page 200 Voice commands Activating system 1 Briefly press the button on the steering wheel An acoustic signal indicates that you can say commands 2 Say the command Ending canceling operation by voice Press the g button on the steering wheel or we Cancel In dialogs where text is spoken not a command e g aname canceling is only possible using the button on the steering wheel Having possible commands read aloud The system understands default commands that m
232. ilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor are switched off until the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse quently locked again 38 Comfort access Comfort access allows you to access your vehi cle without having to hold the remote control in your hand It is sufficient to carry the remote control with you e g in your jacket pocket The vehicle automatically detects the associated remote control in the immediate vicinity or in the interior Comfort access supports the following func tions gt Unlocking locking vehicle gt Comfort closing gt Opening luggage compartment lid tailgate separately gt Sports Wagon opening rear window sepa rately gt Starting engine Functional requirement gt The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid tailgate can only be locked if the vehicle detects that the remote control you are car rying is outside the vehicle gt The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx 2 seconds gt The engine can only be started if the vehicle detects that the remote control is located in the vehicle Comparison with ordinary remote control You can control the functions mentioned previ ously with the comfort access or by pressing the buttons on the remote control Therefore please familiarize yourself with the information on opening and closing beginning on page 28 beforehand The special features when using comfort access are described in t
233. indow cleaning system gt Sedan US gal liters US gal liters US gal liters US quarts liters gt with headlamp cleaning system US quarts liters gt Sports Wagon 264 US quarts liters 535xi 4 100 1 860 4 144 1 880 5 291 2 400 5 335 2 420 1 190 540 2 381 1 080 2 866 1 300 220 100 17 7 58 3 500 1 650 Notes approx 18 5 70 Fuel grade page 221 approx 2 1 8 approx 2 6 10 For more details page 69 approx 3 2 3 approx 5 3 5 approx 5 3 5 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Short commands of voice command system With short commands you can run certain func tions directly regardless of which menu item is selected Here are the important short com mands for the voice command system Assistance window Function To open the assistance window 20 To select the display in the assistance window 20 To change scale in assistance window 142 Communication Function Toopen phone 195 To dial phone number 201 To display phone book 202 To select from the phone book 202 To display Top 8 203 To redial 202 To display Received calls 203 To display Missed calls 203 To display Bluetooth 198 To open BMW Service Services 209 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Command Assistance windows Assistance window map facing northt Assistance window map direction of travel Assistance window arrow display Assistance wi
234. ing waveband 168 172 station search 173 station selection 172 station with the best reception 174 storing stations 174 switching on off 168 tone control 169 volume 169 Weather Band refer to Weather news flashes 175 Radio key refer to Keys remote control 28 Radio position refer to Radio readiness 61 Radio readiness 61 switched off 62 switched on 61 with comfort access 39 Radio stations storing 174 Rain sensor 68 Random random play sequence 184 Random all in audio mode 184 Random directory in audio mode 184 RDS 175 Reading lamps 112 Rear armrest refer to Center armrest rear 126 Rear lamps refer to Tail lamps 246 replacing bulbs 246 Rear seats adjusting head restraints 50 folding over backrest 126 heating 52 removing head restraints 50 Rear socket 126 Rear ventilation 117 Rearview mirror 53 Rear window changing wiper blade 243 heating 115 opening and closing on Sports Wagon 34 roller sun blind refer to Sun blinds 121 wiper on Sports Wagon 69 137 Rear window safety switch 41 Received calls 202 Reception quality 175 radio stations 175 regional station 174 Reception level of mobile phone refer to Status information 20 Recirculated air mode 116 air recirculation 116 AUC Automatic recirculated air control 116 Reclining seat refer to Seats 46 Re
235. ins to monitor the remaining areas and the indicator lamp flashes con 37 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG v i O Opening and closing tinuously after approx 10 seconds How ever the interior motion sensor is not acti vated V The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking your vehicle has not been disturbed while you were away V The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted into the ignition lock however for a maximum of approx 5 minutes your vehicle has been disturbed while you were away Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored The alarm system reacts e g in case of an attempted wheel theft or towing Interior motion sensor In order for the interior motion sensor to func tion properly the windows and glass sunroof must be completely closed Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor may be switched off at the same time This pre vents unintentional alarms e g in the following situations gt In two level garages gt When transporting on car carrying trains by sea or on a trailer gt gt When animals are to remain in the vehicle Switching off tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the Lock button on the remote control again as soon as the vehicle is locked The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then flashes continuously The t
236. intaining speed storing speed and decelerating 3 Interrupting and deactivating system 4 Resuming stored speed Maintaining storing and increasing speed Press lever to resistance point arrow 1 The speed currently being driven is maintained and stored The display 1 in the speedometer see below indicates this regulated speed Every time you press the lever the vehicle s speed increases by roughly 1 mph 1 km h Press lever to resistance point for a longer time The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal The system maintains and stores your current speed as soon as you release the lever Press the lever beyond the resistance point The speed is increased to the next fives posi tion in the mph display or the next tens position in the km h display Press and hold the lever beyond the resistance point The vehicle accelerates more quickly Maintaining speed storing speed and decelerating Pull the lever arrow 2 Functions are the same as 1 the speed is reduced 70 Interrupting system Press the lever up or down arrow 3 the display 1 in the speedometer changes color In addition the system is interrupted gt when you apply the brakes even with the handbrake gt when you shift very slowly when you shift the manual transmission into idling mode or when you shift the automatic transmis sion into the N position gt when DTC is activated or DSC is deacti vated gt whe
237. ion 149 selecting destination using information 149 selecting destination via map 148 selecting route criteria 154 starting destination guidance 156 switching off refer to Terminating continuing destination guidance 156 terminating continuing destination guidance 156 voice instructions 159 volume adjustment 160 Navigation voice instructions 55 159 Neck support refer to Head restraints 49 New address in navigation 151 New destination 144 148 New remote control 28 New route 160 New wheels and tires 229 Next entertainment source 55 Night Vision refer to BMW Night Vision 103 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Night vision device refer to BMW Night Vision 103 Night Vision off 105 Night Vision on off 55 Nozzles refer to Windshield washer nozzles 69 Nylon rope refer to Tow starting and towing 255 O OBD socket refer to Socket for Onboard Diagnostics interface 238 Octane ratings refer to Fuel specifications 221 Odometer 78 Oil refer to Engine oil 234 Oil change intervals refer to Service requirements 81 On anew destination in navigation 149 Onboard computer refer to iDrive 16 Onboard info 80 Onboard toolkit 243 On destination 149 On location 149 Opening and closing comfort access 38 from inside 32 from outside 30 panorama glass sunroof 43 using remote control 30
238. ion and use of the child restraint sys tems Otherwise the degree of protection may be reduced lt 4 56 Backrest width on front passenger seat Open the backrest width setting of the front passenger seat all the way After mounting the child s seat deactivate the active backrest width adjustment and do not call up any memory position Otherwise this limits the stability of the child s seat on the front passen ger seat lt 4 1 After unlocking the vehicle sit on the front passenger seat and close the door to call up the memory position 2 Completely open the backrest width adjust ment refer to page 46 3 Deactivate active backrest width adjust ment refer to page 47 4 Install child s seat Child seat security F All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the front passenger can be locked against pulling out to secure child restraint systems Locking safety belt 1 Secure the child restraint system with the belt 2 Pull out the belt webbing completely 3 Allow the belt webbing to retract and pull taut against the child restraint system The safety belt is locked Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Unlocking safety belt 1 Open the belt buckle 2 Remove the child restraint system 3 Allow the belt webbing to retract com pletely LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHil dren FN Follow the system manufacturer s instructi
239. ion filters gt Certain seating positions gt Objects on the cover of the Head Up Dis play gt Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting conditions If the image is distorted please have the basic setting checked at a BMW center Special windshield The windshield is part of the system The shape of the windshield complies with the require ments of the Head Up Display to enable a pre cise display A film in the windshield prevents the double images from being displayed Windshield replacement should be carried out by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor respondingly trained personnel Care instructions You can find valuable information on this topic under Care starting on page 239 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Only clean the cover of the Head Up Dis play with a soft nonabrasive cloth or with a display cleaning cloth otherwise you may damage it 4 BMW Night Vision The concept BMW Night Vision is a driver assistance system that is designed to provide enhanced vision for certain objects at night This can be especially helpful for detecting people and larger animals When objects are detected the driver may be able to take appropriate action sooner For example the driver may identify and detect the presence of persons or animals in the road ahead or off to the sides and can be more alert slow down or stop blow the horn etc T
240. ipitation gt in sensing road users with poor inherent illumination such as pedestrians cyclists equestrians horsedrawn vehicles railroad 110 or shipping traffic close to the road and at deer crossings gt in tight curves on steep crests or dips with cross traffic or with partially hidden oncoming traffic on divided highways gt in poorly illuminated areas and in the pres ence of highly reflective signs V in the low speed range gt when the windshield is fogged up dirty or covered with stickers decals etc in the area of the inside rearview mirror gt when the sensor is dirty Clean the sensor on the front side of the inside rearview mir ror with a cloth slightly moistened with glass cleaner Moreover no system can operate without limi tations High beam assistant operation is sub ject to conditions that may reduce the system s ability to recognize the difference between actual vehicle head lamps or tail lamps and for example highly reflective signs markers and streetlights To be on the safe side the system may periodically interpret these situations as conditions that require low beams Below are some of the situations in which premature switching to low beams can occur gt approaching large and or highly reflective signs gt approaching certain lights such as drive way lighting and porch lights gt approaching certain traffic signals gt approaching large reflective mark
241. ired function and press the controller 55 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Transporting children safely Transporting children safely The right place for children Do not leave children unattended in the EN vehicle otherwise they could endanger themselves and other persons e g by opening the doors 4 Children always in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is on the rear seat Children younger than 13 years of age or with a height under 5 ft 150 cm may only be transported in the rear in child restraint sys tems which correspond to the age weight and height of the child Otherwise there is an increased danger of injury in an accident lt Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a Suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age size and weight Exception for front passenger seat Should it ever be necessary to use a child restraint system on the front passenger seat the front and side airbags on the passen ger side must first be deactivated Otherwise there is an increased risk of injury for the child if the airbags are triggered even with a child restraint system lt 4 For more information on automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags refer to page 100 Installing child restraint systems Observe the child restraint system manu facturer s instructions for selection installat
242. is in its active mode Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal Even light but consistent pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures brake wear and possibly even brake failure 4 Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles Monitor traffic conditions to ensure that this maneuver does not endanger other road users The heat generated in this process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that full braking efficiency will then be available when you need it Hills FN To prevent overheating and the resulting reduced efficiency of the brake system 136 drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required Even light but consistent pressure on the brake pedal can lead to high temperatures brake wear and possibly even brake failure 4 The braking effect of the engine can be further increased by downshifting if necessary all the way down into first gear This strategy helps you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake system For information on downshifting in the manual mode of the automatic transmission refer to page 64 Do not drive with the clutch depressed in idle or with the engine switched off other wise there will be no engine braking action or support of the braking force and steering Never allow floor mats carpets or any other objects to protrude into the area of mov
243. isplay Mapt Map facing north Map direction of travel or Perspective lt Scale miles or Scale feet lt Route list Navigation info ont Navigation info off Repeat navigation info lt Route menu New route Current positiont Command Car data Onboard infot gt Trip computert Stopwatch Limit Limit ont Limit off Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Entertainment Function Tone control 169 To switch onradio 172 To open FM 172 To open AM 172 To open All stations 172 To select radio station 172 To open Presets 172 To select preset radio station 172 To open Manual 173 To open strongest radio stations 174 Toopen WB 176 To switch on weatherband 176 To select a weatherband station 176 To open SAT 179 To switch on satellite radio 179 To open Presets of satellite radio 180 To open All channels of satellite radio 179 To open Categories of satellite radio 179 To open CD player 181 To switch on CD player 181 To open CD changer 181 To switch on CD changer 181 To select a CD in the CD changer 181 To select music track 182 To select a CD and music track in the CD changer 182 To switch on audio playback with external audio device 187 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Command gt Audio Radio ont FM or AM FM menut gt AM menut FM all stations Station e g Station
244. ithout luggage approx 95 miles 150 km gt With a full load 4 or more persons cargo bay full approx 30 miles 50 km 97 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Technology for comfort convenience and safety Drive reservedly and do not exceed a EN speed of 50 mph 80 km h In the event of pressure loss vehicle handling changes This includes reduced tracking stability in braking extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while the vehicle is being driven this can indicate final failure of the damaged tire Reduce speed and stop at a suitable location as soon as possible otherwise pieces of the tire could become detached and cause an accident Do not con tinue driving but instead contact your BMW center lt Malfunction 4 The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously The tires are shown in gray on the Control Dis play and a message is displayed No flat tire can be detected A message like this is displayed in the following situations gt Incase of a malfunction have the system checked gt If awheel is mounted without TPM elec tronics gt If TPM is temporarily interfered with by other systems or devices which use the same radio frequency Declaration according to NHTSA FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems Each tire including the spare should be checked monthly when col
245. its has been repeated by the system you can delete this sequence of digits we Correct number The digits are deleted The command Correct number can be repeated as often as you like Deleting phone number wt Deletet All digits entered up to this point are deleted Voice phone book Operating by voice command requires a per sonal voice phone book gt With separate drives for audio CDs and nav igation DVDs the entries are automatically adopted from your mobile phone s memory gt With a single drive the entries must be input by voice and are independent of your mobile phone s memory In this case it is not possible to use voice command either to call phone numbers stored in the mobile phone or to store new numbers Up to 50 entries can be input An entry always consists of aname and phone number Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Creating and editing voice phone book Store entry An entry always consists of a name and phone number wr 1 Save names 2 Speak the name The spoken length of the names in the phone book must not exceed approx 2 seconds 3 Speak the phone number after being requested to do so by the system 4 To store the phone number Saves Delete entry You can delete any entry from the voice phone book we 1 Delete names The dialog for deleting an entry is opened 2 Say the name when prompted 3 Confirm the prompt with Yest D
246. ivated accordingly by the sys tem gt The current status of the front passenger airbag i e deactivated or activated is indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior rearview mirror refer to Operating state of front passenger airbags in the following lt Before transporting a child on the front EN passenger seat observe the safety infor mation and handling instructions under Trans porting children safely refer to page 56 The front and side airbags on the front passen ger side can be deactivated for teenagers and adults in certain sitting positions then the indi cator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up In these cases change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are acti vated and the indicator lamp goes out If the desired status cannot be produced by changing the sitting position transport the correspond ing person on the rear seat Do not fit seat cov ers seat cushion padding ball mats or other items onto the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW Do not lay objects under the seat which could press 100 against the seat from below Otherwise a cor rect evaluation of the occupied seat surface cannot be ensured lt 4 Operating state of front passenger airbags Depending on the vehicle s equipment the arrangement of the switches and indicator lamps may differ somewhat The indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags indicates the o
247. ividual vehi cle You should therefore hand over the remote control you last used to drive to the BMW Ser vice Advisor when you take your vehicle in for service Make sure the date is set correctly refer to page 87 otherwise the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured 4 Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service require ments gt BMW recommends that you have service and repair operations performed at your BMW center Take the time to ensure that these service pro cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi cle s Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models These entries verify that your vehicle has received the speci fied regular maintenance lt 4 237 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Maintenance Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnostics interface Components which are decisive for the exhaust gas composition can be checked via the OBD socket with a device This socket is located to the left on the driver s side on the underside of the instrument panel under a cover Exhaust gas values The warning lamp lights up The exhaust
248. k on the pro grammable memory buttons refer to page With compressed audio files you can display any information stored on the current track e g the name of the artist Press the controller Select Details and press the controller To end sampling Press the controller Select Scan and press the controller Directory 4 This cancels sampling of the tracks and the Random all player remains on the current track Repeat track Repeat directory O Det Select the current track and press the con 005 Track 5 troller Select the desired menu item The information for the current track are dis To sample all tracks of the current direc played _ tory select Scan directory and press From radio readiness the setting is stored for the controller the remote control currently in use y To sample all tracks of the CD select Scan all and press the controller 1 The system plays a brief sample from each of shoot Directory 4 the tracks on the current CD Select Set and press the controller Other menu items are displayed 005 Track 5 To end sampling Press the controller Select Scan directory or Scan all and press the controller This cancels sampling and the player remains on the current track 183 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG CD player and CD changer Repeating a track 1 Select Set and press the controller
249. l the cover and the trim piece Information on jump starting and towing from page 254 Sport automatic transmission You can also shift manually with two shift pad dles on the steering wheel You can also choose between two driving pro grams Normal or Sport refer to Dynamic Driv ing Control 66 Shift paddles on steering wheel The shift paddles allow you to shift gears quickly as both hands can remain on the steer ing wheel gt When you use the shift paddles on the steering wheel to shift gears in automatic mode the gearshift system switches into the manual mode gt Ifyou do not shift with the shift paddles and do not accelerate for a certain time the sys tem switches into the automatic mode again when the selector lever is in D gt To shift up pull one of the shift paddles gt To shift down press one of the shift pad dles Dynamic Driving Control The Dynamic Driving Control makes it possible for your BMW to react in an even more perfor mance oriented manner at the push of a button gt The speed range of the engine is optimally utilized gt Gearshifts are faster gt The engine responds more spontaneously to accelerator pedal movements gt The steering will operate in an even sportier mode gt Inthe automatic mode the 6th gear is not engaged Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Activating system E i Press the SPORT button The
250. lass 1 laser prod ucts Do not operate if the cover is damaged otherwise severe eye damage can result Do not use self recorded CDs DVDs with labels applied as these can become detached during playback due to heat buildup and can cause irreparable damage to the device Only use round CDs DVDs with a standard diameter of 4 7 in 12 cm and do not play CDs DVDs with an adapter e g CD singles as other wise the CD DVD or the adapter can jam and may no longer eject properly Do not use a combined CD DVD e g DVDPIS otherwise the CD DVD can jam and will no longer eject lt General malfunctions BMW CD DVD changers and players have been optimized for performance in vehicles In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs DVDs than stationary devices would be If a CD DVD cannot be played first check whether it has been inserted correctly Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa tion on the CD DVD or the laser s scan lens and temporarily prevent playback Malfunctions with individual CDs DVDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs DVDs this can be due to one of the following causes Self recorded CDs DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with self recorded CDs DVDs are e g inconsistent data creation or recording processes or poor quality or high age of the CD DVD blank Only label CDs DVDs on the upper side with a pen intended for this purpose 186 Damaged CDs DVDs Avoid
251. ld other wise be impaired e g ABS DSC or xDrive To maintain good handling and vehicle response use only tires of a single tread config uration from a single manufacturer Following tire damage have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire Pressure Monitor When mounting new tires or converting from summer to winter tires or vice versa only use wheels with TPM electronics otherwise the Tire Pressure Monitor cannot detect a flat tire refer to page 96 Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on this subject 230 Recommended tire brands Certain tire makes are recommended by BMW depending on the tire size You can recognize these from the clearly visible BMW marking on the tire sidewall When used properly these tires comply with the most demanding standards for safety and vehicle response Run flat tires When mounting new tires or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa use run flat tires for your own safety In addition no spare tire is available in case of a flat tire Your BMW center will be glad to advise you Special characteristics of winter tires BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold winter driving conditions Although all season M S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires they generally fail to provide the same levels of cold weather performance as winter tires Paying attentio
252. ler scale to display these individually L Traffic light failure gt Roadwork First the traffic information along the planned General traffic obstruction route is shown sorted according to the distance Transport of hazardous load to the current vehicle position Vehicle on wrong carriage way Depiction of traffic information in map Gad Danger view o coy Low clearance The traffic information symbols are shown in the map view up to a scale of 100 miles 200 km w The section of the route affected by a traffic report as well as the number for the type of inci gt Fog dent are displayed and hidden This occurs as a function of the scale selected Heavy rain Displaying detailed traffic information D Slippery road Select a traffic information item from the list and press the controller Cross winds between 95 Exit 10 and US 1 Exit 8 2 N in 3 6 mis g delay 25min stopped traffic D Stopped traffic To exit from the menu 45 Select the arrow and press the controller A Icy roads 162 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Lane closure Delay gt Police checkpoint a E imis Slow traffic or other event Pe Stop and go traffic PPP Stopped traffic Traffic event in both directions of travel Traffic information during destination guidance System response will vary depending on whether or not Dynamic route is selected refer to page 154
253. ler to the left right front or rear You can open the j menu by pressing the con troller Comfort opening of menu items Comfort opening offers you gt Opening of amenu item of the start menu in the last display shown gt Direct changing between Communication Navigation Entertainment and Climate without pressing the MENU button To do so move the controller in the corre sponding direction and hold it for approx 2 sec onds 18 J Displays in menu 1 1 2 i Menu tem Menu tem amp gating Menu item 4 Menu item amp Menu iter 7 1 Each menu is divided into fields The respective active field is highlighted 2 Asymbol indicates the last selected menu item of the start menu a mr Communication A r D gt Navigation or onboard information v D mm Entertainment m D gt lt Climate Fa rs Thal a Fae ar imenu fit ace bey ery K 1 I v enu iT i Menu item i Wen item K wer jlierti i 1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon tal or vertical lists 2 Inthese lists arrows indicate the possibility of accessing other menu items that are not currently visible 3 Settings are displayed graphically or numerically Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Operating principle at a glance z Basic operation via iDrive is described in this You can view the individual steps under Set view tings
254. ll the way Comfort position The sunroof is not completely open in the com fort position This reduces the wind noises in the interior Each time the panorama glass sunroof is com pletely opened or closed it stops in the comfort position If desired continue the motion follow ing this with the switch Pinch protection system If the panorama glass sunroof or sliding visor encounter resistance when closing from roughly one third of the sunroof opening or when closing from the raised position the clos ing action is interrupted and the panorama glass sunroof and sliding visor reopen a little Despite the pinch protection system inspect the sunroof s travel path prior to closing it as the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions such as very thin objects and the sunroof would con tinue closing 4 Closing without pinch protection system In case of danger from outside slide the switch forward beyond the resistance point and hold The roof closes without the pinch protection system 43 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Opening and closing Following interruptions in electrical power supply After a power loss the sunroof may only respond to the raise command Then have the system initialized BMW recommends having this work done by your BMW center Moving manually In the event of an electrical malfunction you can move the sunroof manually 1 Fold ba
255. lves 4 Raising Press the switch The closed sunroof is raised and the sliding visor opens slightly A Do not use force to close the sliding visor with the glass sunroof in its raised posi tion otherwise the mechanism will be dam aged lt Opening closing Sliding visor You can move the sliding visor independently with the sunroof closed or raised gt Slide the switch back to the resistance point The sliding visor opens as long as you keep the switch in this position gt Briefly press the switch back beyond the resistance point The sliding visor will open automatically Briefly pressing the switch stops the motion You can close the sliding visor in a similar man ner by sliding the switch forwards Panorama glass sunroof With the sliding visor open proceed as described under Sliding visor For information on using the convenient opera tion at the door lock or with the remote control refer to page 30 or 32 For information on comfort closing with comfort access refer to page 39 Opening and closing sunroof and sliding visor together Briefly press the switch beyond the resistance point twice consecutively Briefly pressing the switch stops the motion Comfort modes gt Press the switch twice with the sunroof open The sunroof is raised ir e mur e O gt When the sunroof is raised briefly press the switch twice in the opening direction the sunroof is opened a
256. m outside 30 Central locking system 29 comfort access 38 Changes technical refer to For your own safety 5 refer to Parts and accessories 6 Changing language on Control Display 88 Changing scale for navigation 158 Changing units of measure on Control Display 88 Changing wheels 229 248 CHECK button 84 Check Control 83 Check Control messages 84 Check Gas Cap 221 Checking the air pressure refer to Tire inflation pressure 222 Child restraint fixing system LATCH 57 Child restraints 56 Child restraint systems 56 Child safety lock 59 Child seats refer to Transporting children safely 56 Chime refer to Check Control 83 Chock 249 Chrome plated parts 241 Chrome polish 241 Cigarette lighter 124 Cigarette lighter socket refer to Connecting electrical devices 125 Cleaning your BMW refer to Care 239 Climate 51 114 Clock 78 12h 24h format 87 hour signal 87 setting time and date 86 Closing from inside 32 from outside 30 Closing fuel filler cap 221 Clothes hooks 123 Cockpit 10 Cold start refer to Starting engine 62 Comfort access 38 observe in car wash 39 replacing battery remote control 40 Comfort area refer to Around the center console 14 Comfort seat 46 Communi cation 200 210 211 213 Compact Disc refer to CD changer 181 refer to CD player 181 9 _ 213 U ag Everything from A to Z Compact wheel in
257. matic headlamp control is acti vated the low beams will come on when you switch on the fog lamps 4 Instrument lighting ye E i AN I i a a e mur e O You can control the lighting intensity by using the knurled wheel Interior lamps Control of the interior lamps footwell lamps door entry lighting courtesy lamps and the cargo bay lamps is automatic With the courtesy lamps LED lights are pro vided in the outside rearview mirrors to illumi nate the exterior area around the doors gt To protect the battery all lamps in the vehicle are switched off approx 15 min utes after radio readiness is switched off refer to Start Stop button on page 61 4 Switching interior lamps on and off manually Press the button If the interior lamps footwell lamps door entry lighting and courtesy lamps are to remain switched off continually press the button for approx 3 seconds 111 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Lamps Reading lamps i a il a 1 Reading lamps are located in the front and rear adjacent to the interior lamps Press the button to switch the lamps on and off 112 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Climate Automatic climate control ha ES O PR DRE D 7 16 15 14 13 12 a mi 4 Fi F j L a h _ a iS T ys lt E 1 Air directed toward th
258. mr No malfunctions are present in the moni tored systems Malfunctions are present in the moni tored systems Depending on the mal VAN function supplementary information is shown on the Control Display The symbols also indicate the status of the ser vice requirements display refer to page 81 Displays after completion of trip Malfunction reports generated during the trip are shown consecutively when you switch off the ignition Before the display disappears you can display the messages once again Press the CHECK button for approx 2 seconds If several mes sages are present you can continue to press the CHECK button to view them in succession The display goes out gt after a short time gt when you press the CHECK button again for approx 2 seconds Speed limit You can enter a speed and a Check Control message indicates when you have reached this speed This enables you for example to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area 4 BY You are only warned of reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph 5 km h Displaying setting or changing limit iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Open the start menu 2 Open Navigation Without navigation system Open Car Data 3 Select Car Data and press the controller LL e L mur e O 4 Select Limit and press the controller Gi Car Data
259. n be used for driving at all outside temperatures BMW recommends Castrol Coolant Do not add coolant to the cooling system when the engine is hot Escaping coolant can cause burns 4 Coolant is composed of equal parts water and a coolant additive Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your BMW Ask your BMW center for suitable additives Only use suitable additives otherwise engine damage may result The additives present a health hazard observe the instruc tions on the containers lt 4 re Comply with the appropriate environ mental protection regulations when dis posing of coolant additives lt Checking coolant level 1 Do not open the hood until the engine has cooled down 2 Turn the cap of the expansion tank counter clockwise to allow any accumulated pres sure to escape then continue turning to open 235 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Under the hood 3 The coolant level is correct when the cool ant level is between the MIN and MAX marks refer to the diagram adjacent to the filler neck 4 Ifthe coolant is low slowly add coolant up to the specified level do not overfill 5 Turn the cap until there is an audible click Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi nated as soon as possible 236 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Maintenance BMW maintenance system 4 Stat
260. n for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Preparation 1 Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and approximately the same capacitance in Ah This information can be found on the bat tery 2 Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi cle 3 Switch off any electrical systems and com ponents in both vehicles There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles otherwise there is a danger of shorting 4 Connecting jumper cables To avoid personal injury from sparks fol low this sequence when connecting jumper cables lt In your BMW the so called jump starting termi nal in the engine compartment serves as a pos itive terminal for the battery also refer to engine compartment overview on page 233 The cover cap is marked with a 1 Fold open the cover of the BMW jump starting terminal To do so pull the tab a 2 Attach one end of the jumper cable plus to the positive terminal of the battery or a jump starting terminal of the vehicle provid ing assistance 3 Attach the second end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery or to a start ing aid terminal of the vehicle to be started 4 Attach one end of the jumper cable minus to the negative terminal of the battery or to an engine or body ground of the assisting vehicle Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or negative terminal 5 Attach the second end of the cable
261. n loaded they have a major effect on its handling and steering response You should therefore always remember not to exceed the approved roof load capacity the approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when loading the rack You can find the specified weights under Weights on page 263 Distribute the roof load uniformly The load must not be too large in area Always stow the heaviest pieces on the bottom Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for raising the glass sunroof and that objects do not project into the opening path of the luggage compart ment lid tailgate Secure roof mounted cargo correctly and securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off during the trip Drive smoothly Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers Take corners gently 139 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Ce Q D gt m dition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG ion system t ing naviga Start Starting navigation system Your navigation system can use satellites to ascertain the precise position of your vehicle and guide you reliably to any destination you enter Navigation DVD The navigation system requires a special navi gation DVD The latest version is available at your BMW center Inserting navigation DVD id 1 Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled side up The navigation DVD is retracted 2 Allow seve
262. n the DSC comes on Resuming stored speed Press button 4 The stored speed is resumed and maintained Deactivating system gt Press the lever up or down twice arrow 3 gt Switch off the ignition The speed stored in the memory is deleted Displays in instrument cluster SZ 1 1 Stored speed 2 Selected speed is displayed briefly Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Active cruise control With active cruise control you can select a desired speed which is then automatically maintained when driving on open roadways and is varied to maintain a selected distance setting to slower moving vehicles ahead Active cruise control represents a technological advance over the familiar cruise control and is a welcome relief from the constant adjustment of speed that can accompany driving in traffic on freeways or other high speed thoroughfares Especially on longer trips and in traffic conges tion the system can reduce fatigue and tension while increasing your enjoyment of driving Please use it safely and responsibly In addition to holding a steady cruising speed if you encounter slower vehicles ahead active cruise control will within limits adjust your vehicle s speed automatically so that you can flow with the traffic without having to make con stant adjustments If for example while cruis ing at the selected speed you begin to approach a slower vehicle ahead of you in the same lane
263. n to speed Always observe the maximum permissi ble speed for the winter tires otherwise tire damage may occur which can result in acci dents lt 4 Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Always protect tires against all contact with oil grease and fuels Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of the tire Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Rotating wheels between axles BMW does not recommend moving the front wheels to the rear or vice versa as otherwise the handling characteristics may be impaired With tires of different makes and types sucha change is not permissible Snow chains BMW only tests certain fine link snow chains classifies them as road safe and recommends them Consult your BMW center for more infor mation Use is only permissible in pairs on the rear wheels Observe the manufacturer s instructions when mounting snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph 50 km h with the chains mounted m After mounting snow chains do not ini tialize the Flat Tire Monitor otherwise incorrect displays can occur When driving with snow chains it may be prac tical to briefly activate DTC refer to page 91 4 231 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Under the hood Under the hood Never attempt to perform any service or E
264. ncept The integrated universal remote control can replace as many as three hand held transmit ters for various remote controlled accessories such as garage and gate or lighting systems The integrated universal remote control regis ters and stores signals from the original hand held transmitters The signal of an original hand held transmitter can be programmed on one of the three mem ory buttons 1 After this the programmed memory button 1 will operate the system in question The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans mission of the signal Should you sell your vehicle one day be sure to delete the stored programs beforehand for your safety refer to page 121 To prevent possible damage or injury before programming or using the inte grated universal remote control always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no peo ple animals or objects are within the travel range of the device Also comply with the safety precautions of the original hand held transmitter 4 Checking compatibility If you see this symbol on the packaging or in the manual supplied with the orig inal hand held transmitter it is safe to assume that it is compatible with the integrated universal remote control gt If you have additional questions please Lk contact your BMW center or call 1 800 355 3515 Information is also provided on the Internet at www bmwusa com or www homelink com HomeLinkis a registered tra
265. nd press the controller 5 Adjust volume and sound if necessary About programmable memory buttons You can save the audio AUX function on the programmable memory buttons To start audio playback refer to page 21 ed 3 fa ed S ed Lu 187 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG USB audio interface USB audio interface You can connect audio devices to the USB audio interface e g an iPod or a USB device MP3 player USB memory stick You can then operate these via iDrive The system can play back common audio files e g MP3 WMA WAV PCM and ACC as well as playback lists in the M3U format Due to the large number of audio devices avail able on the market operation via the vehicle cannot be ensured for every audio device Ask your BMW center which audio devices are suitable Connecting 1 USB interface 2 Connection for audio playback 1 8 in 3 5 mm jack plug iPod To connect the iPod use the BMW cable adapter for Apple iPods For more information please contact a BMW center or consult our website www bmw com For audio playback via the vehicle speakers connect the iPod to the connections 1 and 2 The USB audio interface supports the iPod menu structure 188 USB device Use a flexible adapter cable for connec tion to protect the USB interface and your USB device against mechanical damage lt 4 For audio playback via the vehicle speak
266. ndow perspectives Assistance window current position Assistance window trip computer or Assistance window onboard infot Assistance window scale feet or Assistance window scale milest Command Phones Dial number lt A to Z Call or Dial name gt Top 8 Redial Received calls lt Missed calls lt Bluetooth BMW service 265 S O Gen 3 ad Short commands of voice command system Navigation Function To open navigation system 142 To open Enter address 144 To open New destination 144 To display Input map 148 To display destination list 150 To display address book 151 To display route criteria 154 To start destination guidance 156 To end destination guidance 156 To display arrow display 142 To display map display 158 Tochange scale 158 To display roads or towns cities along route 159 To switch on voice instructions 159 To switch off voice instructions 159 To repeat voice instructions 160 Toopenroute 157 To open New route 160 To display current position 163 Onboard info Function To open Car Data 80 To display computer 80 To display trip computer 80 To open stopwatch 85 To open speed limit 85 To activate speed limit 85 To deactivate speed limit 85 266 Command Navigation Enter address New destinationt Input map Destination list Address book Route preference Start guidancet Stop guidance Arrow d
267. necessary enter more letters Select State Province or the displayed The list gradually grows smaller each time country and press the controller you enter a new letter Enter blank space if necessary l Select the _ symbol and press the con Enter address troller Town city Street House number we Town City Beverly Essex MA Intersection Are Beverly Randolph WV The list of available countries appears on Beverly Glen Los Angeles CA the display Beverly Hills Los Angeles CA Select the country of destination and press the controller Change to the third field from the top if nec essary Turn the controller until the town city name is selected from the list and press the controller In order to be able to start the destination guid ance at least the town city of the destination or its zip code must be entered Select Town City or the displayed town BEVERLY BEACH city and press the controller BEVERLY HILLS CALIFORNIA Select the starting letter and press control BEVERLY HILLS MICHIGAN ler BEVERLY HILLS MISSOURI A list of all towns cities starting with this let BEVERLY HILLS TEXAS ter appears on the Control Display To delete the letter entered if necessary a Select Town City and press the control AL EEO R ULY ler Enter the zip code Select the desired digits and press the con troller Town City BADGER UNINC TULARE COUNTY BAK
268. ng 99 airbags 101 brake system 93 DSC 13 91 DTC 13 92 Flat Tire Monitor 95 fog lamps 13 safety belt warning 50 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 97 Indicator and warning lamps 13 Inflation pressure refer to Tire inflation pressure 222 Inflation pressure monitoring refer to Flat Tire Monitor 94 refer to TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 96 Info menu 17 Information on another location 149 on current position 149 on destination location 149 Information in navigation 149 Information menu refer to i menu 17 Information on destination 151 Info sources 81 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Initializing Flat Tire Monitor 94 radio refer to Storing stations 174 refer to Power failure 251 refer to Setting time and date 86 seat mirror and steering wheel memory 47 Input map 149 Installation location CD changer 185 drive for navigation DVD 142 mobile phone 122 Instructions for navigation system refer to Voice instructions 159 Instrument cluster 12 Instrument illumination refer to Instrument lighting 111 Instrument lighting 111 Instrument panel refer to Cockpit 10 Instrument panel refer to Instrument cluster 12 Integrated key 28 Integrated universal remote control 120 Interesting destination for navigation 149 Interim time 86 Interior lamps 111 switching on with remote con
269. ng area of the roll up cover is clear of obstructions other wise the payload or the roll up cover may be damaged lt 4 LL e mur e O Expanding cargo bay The rear backrest is divided You can fold down both sides separately in order to expand the cargo bay Reach into the recess and pull toward the front When you fold back the backrest be sure that the catch engages securely The red warning indicator disappears in the recess when the catch is engaged If it is not properly engaged transported cargo could enter the passenger compartment during braking or eva sive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu pants 4 To ensure that the safety systems con tinue to provide optimized protection please observe the safety belt information on page 45 4 127 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG ior accessories Practical inter Partition net A Do not allow the partition net to snap back otherwise there is a risk of injury and the partition net may be damaged 4 With normal cargo bay Pull the partition net out of the case by the loop Grasp the rod on both sides and insert it in the brackets arrow 1 This is best carried out from the rear seat When you no longer require the partition net grasp the rod on both sides and remove it from the brackets arrow 2 Then slowly allow the partition net to glide into the case With an expanded cargo bay 1 Fold down both
270. ng fuel always observe all Switch off the engine before refueling 3 Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol otherwise no fuel can be filled into the applicable precautionary measures and regulations Never transport reserve fuel con D tainers in the vehicle These could become leaky and cause an explosion or a fire in an acci dent lt 4 Fuel filler door Sports Wagon 1 Unhook the retaining strap refer to page 129 2 Open the right hand side panel in the cargo a bay et 3 Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol SA EE To open and close press the rear edge ofthe fuel filler door Manual release If an electrical malfunction should occur you can unlock the fuel filler door manually Observe the following when refueling Sedan When handling fuels follow the safety 1 precautions posted at the filling station Otherwise there is a danger of personal injury or property damage 4 In the cargo bay raise the floor mat and the cover located beneath it Open the snap fasteners of the right side panel and take off the side panel 220 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler door When refueling insert the filler nozzle com pletely into the filler pipe Avoid raising the filler nozzle during refueling otherwise this leads to gt premature pump shutoff gt areduced efficiency of
271. ng on the directory structure Via iDrive To start playback when there is already a CD in the drive iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller backwards to open Entertainment 3 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until CD is selected and press the controller DPM AM WB SAT CO Track 1 4 With a CD changer change to the second field from the top and turn the controller until CD is selected and press the control ler The CD player is started a e CD ca CDi CD2 Cb3 CD4 P 10 11 01 02 00 00 Playback starts automatically if the sound out put is switched on About programmable memory buttons You can store the CD player function on the programmable memory buttons To start the CD player refer to page 21 Eject CD Press the El button next to CD player The CD emerges slightly from the drive CD changer starting CD Fill the CD magazine and insert refer to page 185 181 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG ed 3 ed S O ed LLI Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Move the controller backwards to open Entertainment Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until CD is selected and press the controller Change to the second field from the top if necessary Turn the controller
272. ning t 3 Fold back the center armrest 4 Sports Wagon thread the retaining strap between the backrest and the roll up cover Make sure that the rear backrest is locked in position al A O ed O O 5 Attach the retaining strap hook to the mounting point 6 Pull the retaining strap taut On trips If the vehicle is equipped with rear side airbags make sure that children do not lean out of the child s seat towards the door panels Otherwise injuries can be caused if the side airbags are triggered lt 4 Child safety locks for rear doors Slide down the safety lever on the rear doors the door can now be opened from the outside only 59 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Transporting children safely Safety switch for power windows Always press the safety switch for the power windows refer to page 41 when children are riding in the rear of the vehicle 60 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Driving Ignition lock Inserting remote control into ignition lock 2 00 Insert the remote control as far as possible into the ignition lock Radio readiness switches on Some electronic systems consumers are ready for operation Comfort access With comfort access only insert the remote control into the ignition lock in exceptional cases refer to page 38 Removing remote control from ignition lock Do not pull the
273. njuries can occur if the front airbags are triggered Make sure that occupants do not rest their head on the side or head airbags otherwise injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered lt 4 Even if you adhere to all the instructions inju ries resulting from contact with airbags cannot be fully excluded depending on the circum stances The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi tive individuals This effect is usually only tem porary For airbag locations and additional information on airbags refer to page 99 Head restraints A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident Adjust the head restraint so that its center iS approx at ear level Otherwise there is increased danger of injury in the event of an accident 4 v i O Head restraints refer to page 49 Safety belts Before every drive make sure that safety belts are being worn at all of the occupied seats Air bags complement the safety belt as an addi tional safety device but they do not represent a substitute Your vehicle is provided with five seats which are all equipped with a safety belt Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt Never allow infants or small children to ride in a passenger s lap Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen The safety belt
274. ntly in use 1 Select Time format and press the control ler 2 Select the desired format and press the controller The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Setting date 1 Select Date and press the controller 10 21 2008 MMDD Set date Date format A O E O O 2 Select Set date and press the controller The first setting of the date display is selected 3 Turn the controller to make the adjustment 4 Press the controller to apply the setting The next setting is selected 5 Make the remaining adjustments After the last adjustment the date is stored 1 Select Date format and press the control ler 2 Select the desired format and press the controller The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Brightness of Control Display The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions However you can change the basic setting iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller Select Display settings and press the controller 87 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Everything under control 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Brightness is selected and press the controller Head Up Displa
275. ny braking action by the system is interrupted and the distance indi cator goes out until the pedal is fully released As soonas you fully release the accelerator the system will again control your cruising speed and distance setting While driving with the sys tem activated resting your foot on the acceler ator pedal will cause the system not to brake even when necessary Be certain that floormats or other objects on the vehicle floor do not inter fere with movement of the accelerator pedal lt v i O While active cruise control is capable of braking your vehicle automatically when you approach a slower vehicle ahead it is important to be aware that the ability of the sys tem to apply the brakes is also limited e g when you reduce your desired speed sharply It uses only a portion of braking system capacity and does not utilize the full capacity of the vehi cle braking system Therefore the system can not decrease your speed due to large differ ences in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead Example when you approach a vehicle traveling at a much lower speed than your own speed such as approaching a toll booth or when a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you at close range lt 4 77 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Everything under control Everything under control Odometer outside temperature display clock 1 Time outside temperature and date 2
276. oil level 234 electronic oil level check 234 interval between changes refer to Service requirements 81 oil change 235 oil grades refer to Approved engine oils 235 Engine oil level 234 Engine output refer to Engine data 260 Engine overheating refer to Coolant temperature 78 Engine speed refer to Engine data 260 Engine starting refer to Starting engine 62 Enter address 144 151 Entering destination via town city name 145 Entering intersection navigation 146 Entering the address 144 147 Entering town city for navigation 145 Entering zip code for navigation 145 Entertainment 168 Entertainment sound output on off 169 Entry map for destination 148 Environmentally friendly driving refer to Energy control 79 Equalizer refer to Tone control 171 Equalizer refer to Tone control 171 ESN 178 ESP Electronic Stability Program refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 91 Event Data Recorders 238 Exhaust system refer to Hot exhaust system 135 Exterior mirrors 53 adjusting 53 automatic dimming feature 54 automatic heating 53 folding in and out 53 tilting down passenger side exterior mirror 53 External audio device 123 Eye for tow starting and towing refer to Tow fitting 255 IF Fader refer to Tone control 170 Fader refer to Tone control 170 Failure messages refer to Check Control 83 False alarm refer to Avoiding unintentional
277. oller ix Navigation b New destination e SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY WA pute list Route preference Arrow display r 3 Turn the controller to enter the desired number and press the controller The route is recalculated To exit from the menu without changing the route 4 Select the arrow and press the controller Traffic information In many congested areas you can receive traf fic information transmitted by radio stations The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic management centers and the traffic information IS periodically updated During destination guidance the traffic infor mation relevant to your planned route is auto matically displayed Whether destination guid ance is active or not you can have the traffic information displayed in the map view or in the traffic info list Switching reception of traffic information on off iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the menu Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller Into sources Display o P lt During destination guidance traffic information Audio can be displayed in the arrow or map view Display settings If the symbol is shown with a red border traf Steering wheel buttons fic information is available
278. olume 170 Turn the controller The adjustment is applied the field can be changed FA Speed volume t Speed dependent volume You can choose between Stereo and Surround Select Surround Settings and press the controller il me Equalizer Stereo Surround Select Stereo or Surround JS Surround Settings surround Press the controller The spatial sound effect is activated You can select a spatial sound effect that improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency ranges Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Select Surround Settings and press the controller Aime Equalizer Off Concert hall Theater Select Concert hall or Theater Z Surround Settings Off Theater cS Press the controller LOGIC7 spatial sound is switched on To cancel the spatial sound effect Select Off and press the controller LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered trade marks of Lexicon Inc a company of the Harman International Group You can set individual sound frequency ranges Select Equalizer and press the controller Surround Settings P 1 gt LITT 100 200 500 IK 2K SK 10K Move the controller to the left or right to select the desired frequency range Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected You can reset all tone settings to the default settings Open the start menu Press the controller
279. ompartment Carpeting floor mats and luggage compart ment rugs and paneling can be cleaned with a vacuum or in the event of more serious soiling cleansed with an interior cleaner Floor mats and luggage compartment rugs can be removed for cleaning When inserting into place make sure that the seat rails do not pro trude over the floor mats otherwise floor mats can be damaged Fluff on new floor mats is a result of the produc tion process and can be removed by repeated vacuuming Plastic components inside Clean the glass cover of the instrument panel imitation leather surfaces lamp lenses and matte components with water and if necessary a solvent free plastic cleaner Fine wooden components Use a damp cloth to clean fine wooden trim panels and components Follow up by drying with a soft cloth Safety belts Do not use cleansers to clean the safety belts since this can destroy the web bing 4 Inside sensors Clean inside sensors such as those of the high beam assistant using a lint free cloth moist ened with glass cleaner Displays Clean displays like the radio or the Control Dis play using a display cleaning cloth or a soft nonabrasive lint free cloth A Avoid using excessive pressure when cleaning displays otherwise you could damage them 4 gt z O 241 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Care Never use chemical based cleansers or household s
280. ompartment 1 Release both quick release fasteners 2 Fold the cover forward or remove Sedan in cargo bay 1 Lift up floor mat 2 Release the quick release fastener of the right side panel and pull out the panel 252 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Giving and receiving assistance Emergency request Conditions for an emergency request gt Full preparation package mobile phone With this equipment an emergencyrequest IS Still possible when no mobile phone is paired with the vehicle gt BMW Assist is activated Activating BMW Assist refer to page 215 gt gt Radio readiness is activated gt The BMW Assist system is logged on toa mobile phone network gt The emergency request system is opera ble Once your BMW Assist subscription expires the BMW Assist system can be deactivated by a BMW center without you having to visit a workshop Once the BMW Assist system has been deactivated emergency requests are not possible The BMW Assist system can be reac tivated by a BMW center after signing a new contract Initiating an emergency request 1 Briefly press protective cover to open Depending on the vehicle s equipment the arrangement of the switches and indicator lamps may differ somewhat 2 Press the SOS button for at least 2 sec onds The LED in the button lights up As soon as the voice connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been established
281. on firmly the first time this also opens the cover in the cargo bay 3 Extend the ski bag between the front seats and fill it The zipper facilitates access to the stowed items and drying of the ski bag 4 Insert the latch plate of the ski bag retaining strap into the center safety belt buckle that is marked CENTER Only stow clean skis in the ski bag Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage 130 Securing cargo After loading secure the ski bag and its con tents Tighten the retaining strap on the ten sioning buckle for this purpose Secure the ski bag in this way If you fail to do so it could endanger vehicle occu pants during braking or evasive maneuvers 4 To store the ski bag perform the above steps in reverse order Removing ski bag The ski bag can be completely removed e g for faster drying or to allow you to put it to other uses 1 Pull the handle forward and pull the ski bag up and out 2 Close the cover in the cargo bay gt Your BMW center will be glad to provide _ you with more detailed information on the various items of equipment 4 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG ooue 6 e y S 01 U09 sdi Bulaug uoljeBiaenN juowuuie 1o u SUONeDIUNWIWOD AIO Pre 131 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Driving tips This section is designed to provide yo
282. on Control Display Setting time refer to page 86 4 ENET a at Menu item 2 Menuiterm4 Settings Driving tips Manu iter 4 Keer tern 5 Menu item f Meru item AENA ELOLA Menu itema Ment item Manua item 6 Miori item 7 Menu thei g Mers therm 9 Communications Entertainment 1 Selecting menu item 4 Changing between fields gt Turn the controller the highlight moves gt Briefly move the controller left right gt Menu items shown in white can be forward or back selected by highlighting gt Release controller 2 Activating menu item gt Active field appears lighter gt Press the controller 5 Adjusting settings gt New menu items are displayed or the gt Turn controller function is carried out gt Graphic display numerical value or text 3 Selecting menu item refer to 1 displays can be changed gt Confirmation by changing field v oO v i V W U x 19 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG iDrive Status information 6 Display for gt Entertainment Radio CD AUX USB audio interface gt Telephone in Communication Name of linked mobile phone network search or no network gt BMW Assist Existing voice connection with a service from BMW Assist Entertainment sound output off Station that transmits traffic information is received EI Reception of traffic information for the nav igation system is possible
283. on once per program gt Comfort one LED gt Normal two LEDs gt Sport three LEDs To deactivate press button longer Button with one LED al Press the button repeatedly until the desired program is shown on the Control Display The LED in the button lights up Me e ed e O Active backrest adjustment Driver Normal F To deactivate press button longer Easy entry exit To facilitate entry and exit the backrest width temporarily opens all the way Seat mirror and steering wheel memory ATEN me 2 You can store and request two different posi tions for the driver s seat and passenger seat exterior rearview mirrors and steering wheel 47 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Adjusting The adjustment of the lumbar support is not stored in the memory Storing 1 Switch on radio readiness or ignition refer to page 61 2 Set the desired seat exterior mirror and steering wheel positions 3 Press the MB button The LED in the button lights up 4 Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 The LED goes out Requesting A Do not request a position from the mem ory while the vehicle is moving There is a risk of accident from unexpected movement of the seat or steering wheel 4 Comfort mode 1 Open the driver s door after unlocking or switch on radio readiness 2 Briefly press the desired memory button 1
284. on page 144 150 Onine Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Select Navigation and press the controller New destination MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY WY Route preference Ai row ci p fl y i The last destination entered is the first item in the destination list e This symbol indicates the current destina tion during destination guide To display additional destinations from the des tination list Turn the controller Select the desired destination and press the controller Select Start guidance and press the con troller wX Navigation Add cadis book information on destination Delete entry Delete list Arrow display s Select the desired destination in the desti nation list and press the controller The selected destination can be edited Store entry Select Add to address book Display information on destination Select Information on destination Delete entry Select Delete entry Delete all entries Select Delete list The destination guidance is switched off Change entry Select Edit For operation refer to Entering destination via town city name page Press the controller iDrive for operating principle refer to page lalvigation Gar Data I7 New destination e SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY WA Route preference A row i g ml ay t Select Address book and press the controller
285. ons Select Navigation voice instructions and press the controller UM Languages Text language English US O Arrow display pop up instructions The voice instructions are switched on The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use 159 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG ion guidance Destinat Repeating and canceling voice instructions With the programmable buttons on the steering wheel you can also make the following settings refer to page 54 gt Repeat the voice instruction Press button gt Switch voice instructions on off Press button longer Setting volume of voice instructions The volume can only be adjusted while a voice instruction is being output 1 Repeat the last voice instruction if neces Sary 2 Turn the knob during the voice instruction to select the desired volume This volume is independent of the volume of the audio sources The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Bypassing route sections During destination guidance you can revise the navigation system s route recommendations to avoid particular stretches of road Enter the number of miles kilometers that you want to travel before returning to the original route 160 1 Select Navigation and press the control ler 2 Change into the third field from the top Turn the controller until New route is selected and press the contr
286. ons on installation and use of LATCH child restraint systems in order not to impair their protective function Before attaching the LATCH child s seat pull the belt away from the region of the child restraint fixing system Make sure that the LATCH mounts have properly clicked into place and that the child restraint system is resting snugly against the backrest Otherwise the protective action may be impeded lt Sedan rear seats a a The anchor points for the LATCH anchors are located at the positions indicated by arrows in the gap between the seat and the backrest Sedan rear seats with through loading system a e mur e O The anchor points for the LATCH anchors are located behind the indicated protective caps Remove the cover caps before mounting the child s seat Sports Wagon rear seats The anchor points for the LATCH anchors are located behind the indicated protective caps and are covered again after the child s seat is removed 97 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Transporting children safely Child restraint system with tether strap Only use the tether strap mounting points to secure child restraint systems otherwise the mounting points could be dam aged lt Sedan mue There are three additional mounting points for child restraint systems with a tether strap refer to arrows Fold the corresponding mounting point upward before using
287. ont passenger by responding to frontal stery in the center of the steering wheel on the impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro instrument panel the doors and the roof pillars vide adequate restraint When needed the along with the sides of the headliner Do not head and side airbags help provide protectionin attempt to remove or dismantle the steering 99 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Technology for comfort convenience and safety wheel Do not touch the individual components immediately after the system has been trig gered because there is a danger of burns In the event of malfunctions deactivation or triggering of the airbag restraint system have the testing repair removal and disposal of air bag generators executed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel and has the required explosives licenses Otherwise unprofessional attempts to service the system could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired airbag triggering either of which could result in personal injury lt Warnings and information on the airbags is also provided on the sun visors Automatic deactivation of front passenger airbags The occupation of the seat is detected by eval uating the impression on the occupied seat sur face of the front passenger seat The front and side airbags on the front passenger side are activated or deact
288. ontroller pE Incoming call f Select Reject and press the controller The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has been activated Select Phone and press the controller fi BMW Assist Dial 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKL 4 i Number Select Dial and press the controller Enter the desired phone number by dialing the individual digits and pressing the con troller Always enter the complete phone number consisting of national dialing code area code and phone number The letters correspond to the digits on the keypad of the mobile phone To delete the last digit Move the controller toward the right to select the arrow and press the control ler Select Dial number and press the control ler i F Phone 4 Dial 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKL i 06917345678 Alternative Press the ff button on the steering wheel For your phone number to be displayed to the person you are Calling the display of phone numbers must be enabled by your service pro vider You can store and request phone numbers using the programmable memory buttons refer to page Press the gf button on the steering wheel Alternative Select the phone number and press the controller T Phone 1 Active calls 201 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Telephoning 2 End call is selected Press the controller Tl pes Phone Active calls
289. or 2 The system cancels the adjustment procedure when you briefly press one of the seat adjust ment switches or one of the memory buttons Safety feature 1 Close the driver s door and switch the igni tion on or off 2 Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 and maintain pressure until the adjustment process has been completed If the BC button was pressed inadvertently press the button again the LED goes out Requesting with remote control The last positions of the driver s seat the exte rior rearview mirrors and steering wheel are stored for the remote control currently in use You can choose when the position is requested gt Request when unlocking vehicle gt Request when opening driver s door 48 A When using this feature always make sure that the footwell behind the driver s seat is empty and unobstructed Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or damage to objects behind the seat as a result of a rearward movement of the seat 4 The system cancels the adjustment procedure when you briefly press one of the seat adjust ment switches or one of the memory buttons iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 Open the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu Select Settings and press the controller a SS Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Door locks is selected and press the cont
290. or lamp lights up DTC is activated DTC Deactivating DTC Press the button again the DTC indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out xDrive xDrive is the 4 wheel drive system of your BMW The combined effects of xDrive and DSC further optimize the traction and dynamic driv ing characteristics The 4 wheel drive system xDrive variably distributes the drive torque to the front and rear axle depending on the driving situation and prevailing road conditions HDC Hill Descent Control The concept HDC is a system for driving downhill in steep terrain This system reduces vehicle speed on steep downhill gradients thus allowing you to maintain even better control of your BMW under these conditions The vehicle moves at approximately twice walking speed without active intervention from the driver HDC is available for activation at vehicle speeds below approx 22 mph 35 km h When driving down steep hills with a speed below approx 22 mph 35 km h the vehicle reduces speed automatically down to approximately twice nor mal walking speed approx 7 mph 12 km h and then keeps this speed constant You can use the accelerator or brakes to vary this automatically controlled speed within a range extending from approx 3 mph 5 km h to 15 mph 25 km h You can specify a target speed within the same range by using the lever of the cruise control 92 Activating HDC You can activate HDC gt with the programmabl
291. oth gt The data transmitted can for example be the vehicle data your current position or the CBS Condition Based Service data Using services Contacting BMW Assist Response Center You can contact the BMW Assist Response Center via the SOS button 1 Briefly press protective cover to open Depending on the vehicle s equipment the arrangement of the switches and indicator lamps may differ somewhat 2 Press the button for at least 2 seconds The BMW Assist Response Center is con tacted 210 Roadside assistance iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Communication we Climate Navigation Entertainment 2 Move the controller forward to select Communication 3 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until BMW Assist is selected and press the controller Phone Service Request Start service REXFORD DRIVE BEVERLY HILLS CA 4 Select Roadside Assistance and press the controller RE BMW Assist ip a Service Request gt start service Heading north REXFORD DRIVE BEVERLY HILLS CA If the location can be determined the cur rent vehicle position is displayed 5 Select Start service and press the con troller Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you to the Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group
292. otice an object of interest ahead be prepared to slow down or stop blow the horn or take other appropriate action A fe io ra lt e System limits The system is designed to supplement but not replace forward vision through the windshield The driver is responsible for safe driving at night BMW Night Vision is not designed to be used as a continuous viewing window for driv ing at night No system no matter how sophisticated can operate without limitations BMW Night Vision operation is subject to physical and environ mental limitations that will reduce the ability of the system to detect and display a clear thermal image Some of the situations in which these limitations can occur are gt on steep hilltops or depressions and in tight curves gt in tunnels as the contrast is inherently low gt when the camera lens is dirty 103 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Technology for comfort convenience and safety V in dense fog heavy rain or snowfall V when displaying very hot objects such as transformers car exhausts etc V when the image briefly freezes during nor mal system adjustment A BMW Night Vision s potential benefits can be limited by the driving style of the driver the size and relative temperature of the detected objects dirt or contamination on the camera lens adverse weather like snow rain or fog and other factors not mentioned
293. ow a BMW with xDrive with just the front or rear axle raised otherwise the wheels could lock up and the transfer case could be damaged lt 4 Have the BMW transported only on a flatbed surface Tow starting Do not tow start the vehicle if possible but instead start the engine by means of jump start ing refer to page 254 With a catalytic con verter tow starting should only be carried out with the engine cold and with automatic trans missions the engine cannot be started by tow starting 1 Switch on the hazard warning flashers comply with country specific regulations 2 Switch on the ignition refer to page 61 3 Shift into 3rd gear 4 Tow start with the clutch completely depressed and slowly release the clutch After the engine starts immediately depress the clutch again completely 5 Stop at a suitable location remove the tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn ing flashers 6 Have the vehicle checked 257 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Technical data Technical data Engine data Displacement cu in cms No of cylinders Maximum output hp at engine speed rpm Maximum torque lb ft Nm at engine speed rpm 260 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 528i xi 182 8 2 99
294. p refer to Center brake lamp 247 Through loading system 126 Tightening torque of the lug bolts refer to After mounting 250 Tilt alarm sensor 38 switching off 38 Tilting down passenger side exterior mirror 53 Time 87 Time format 87 Timer refer to Preselecting activation times 118 Timer 2 for parked car ventilation 118 Timer 1 for parked car ventilation 118 Tire inflation pressures 222 Tire pressure loss 95 96 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 96 Tire Quality Grading 228 Tire replacement new wheels and tires 229 Tires age 228 air loss 95 97 breaking in 134 changing 229 condition 229 damage 229 flat tire refer to Changing wheels 248 inflation pressure 222 new wheels and tires 229 pressure monitoring refer to Flat Tire Monitor 94 pressure monitoring refer to TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 96 replacing 248 retreaded tires 230 run flat tires 229 size 227 tread 229 wear indicators 229 wheel tire combination 229 winter tires 230 Tire trouble changing wheels 248 compact wheel 250 TMC station refer to Traffic information 160 Tone 169 Tone dialing method 204 Tone in audio mode adjusting 169 middle setting 171 Tone on locking unlocking 31 Tools refer to Onboard toolkit 243 Top 8 for mobile phone 202 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Torch 122 Torq
295. perating status of the front and side airbags on the front passenger side depending on the seat occupation The indica tor lamp shows whether the front passenger airbags are activated or deactivated gt The indicator lamp lights up when a child in a child restraint system intended for the purpose is properly detected on the seat The front and side airbags on the front pas senger side are not activated gt Most child s seats are detected by the system Especially the child s seats required by the NHTSA at the time the vehicle is manufactured After installing a child s seat make sure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up This indicates that the child s seat has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not activated 4 gt The indicator lamp does not light up when for example a correctly seated person of sufficient height is detected on the seat The front and side airbags on the front pas senger side are activated gt The indicator lamp does not light up when the seat is empty However the front and side airbags on the front passenger side are not activated Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Operational readiness of airbag system es N From radio readiness refer to page 61 the warning lamp lights up briefly indicating the operational readiness of the entire airbag sys tem and the safety belt tensioners Airbag system malfunction gt
296. pon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists When the mal function indicator lights up the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly Active steering The concept The active steering is a system that actively var ies the steering angle of the front wheels in rela tion to the steering wheel movements When you are driving in the low road speed range e g ina town or when parking the steer ing angle increases i e the steering becomes very direct In the higher speed range on the other hand the steering angle is reduced more and more This improves the handling capability of your BMW over the entire speed range Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG In critical situations the system can make tar Brake force display geted corrections to the steering angle pro vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes This stabilizing intervention is simultaneously deactivated when DSC is switched off refer to page 91 _ CA
297. prox 1 second The tailgate opens somewhat It can be swung upward Dl When opening the tailgate the roll up _ cover is raised Before closing the tail gate press down the roll up cover until it engages lt 4 Opening manually In case of an electrical malfunction 1 From the cargo bay press out the cover 1 on the tailgate with a screwdriver Ci NE EA 2 Press the locking bar 2 in the direction of the arrow 3 Open the tailgate and press in the cover again 35 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Opening and closing The tailgate is locked again as soon asitis closed Closing FN Make sure that the closing path of the tail gate is clear otherwise injuries may result The handle recesses on the interior trim of the tailgate make it easier to pull down To close the tailgate merely press it down gen tly The closing process will then be carried out automatically Sports Wagon automatic tailgate operation Adjusting opening height You can adjust how far the tailgate is to open iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Vehicle Tires and press the con troller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Door locks is selected and press the controller 36
298. pter at the front and Removing mobile phone press down until it engages Press button To remove the snap in adapter Press the area 1 around the button Inserting mobile phone 1 Remove the protective cap from the mobile phone s antenna connector if necessary so that the mobile phone can engage in the snap in adapter 2 Push the mobile phone with the buttons facing upward toward the electrical connec tions and press down until it engages The mobile phone s battery is charged from radio readiness or with the steering unlocked gt To protect the vehicle s batteries avoid using the phone when the ignition is switched off 4 208 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG BMW Assist BMW Assist provides you with various services For example the position data of your vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center if an emergency request has been initiated Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi vidually agreed contract After your contract has expired the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without you having to visita BMW center After the BMW Assist sys tem has been deactivated no BMW Assist ser vice will be available The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a BMW center after sign Ing anew contract Requirements You can use BMW Assist when the following requirements are met gt The installed BMW Assist s
299. r A nm gt 0 5 mis SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY STREET e This symbol indicates the current destina tion Select the current destination and press the controller MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY Wy Route preference gt Arrow display Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 2 Select Stop guidance and press the con troller M Navigation Ad d to address book Information on destination Delete entry Delete fist Arf row H bn uy When you park the vehicle before reaching the entered destination the following question is displayed before beginning the next trip Continue guidance to destination The destination guidance starts automatically after a short time To start the destination guidance Select Yes and press the controller Displaying route You have the option of displaying various views of the route during destination guidance From another menu you can change ea directly to the screen last displayed refer to Comfort opening of menu items page 18 4 Displaying arrow display 1 Select Navigation and press the control ler 2 Change into the fourth field from the top Turn the controller until Arrow display is selected and press the controller aX Navigation New destination e SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY W Route preference Current position IP The arrow display is shown 0 5 mis
300. r 211 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG The data relevant for service are transmitted Your BMW center will contact you to set up an appointment for service Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Press the controller to open the j menu Select Settings and press the controller Display oD lt Info sources Audio Display settings Steering wheel buttons Vehicle Tires Language Units Time Date Select BMW Service settings and press the controller i Woo Settings lw Vehicle Tires a Language Units Age Time Date Ha Traffic info settings im Bluetooth Select Enabled TeleServices and press the controller a Assist profile Options Activated services Service Request Customer Relations Auto Request The activated BMW Assist services are dis played Options is selected press the controller 212 Select Update services and press the controller For information on all aspects of your vehicle you can contact BMW Customer Relations Press the MENU button This opens the start menu Move the controller forward to select Communication Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until BMW Assist is selected and press the controller Phone Service Request Start service REXFORD DRIVE BEVERLY HILLS CA Select Customer Relations We BMW Assist A Servi
301. railer cou plings or thin and wedge shaped objects etc 90 Low objects already displayed e g curbs can also disappear from the detection area of the sensors again before or after a continuous tone already sounds Higher protruding objects e g ledges cannot be detected For this reason drive with care otherwise there is a danger of personal injury or property damage Loud sources of sound inside and outside the vehicle could drown out the PDC signal tone 4 Driving stability control systems Your BMW is equipped with an extended array of systems designed to enhance and maintain vehicle stability under extreme conditions ABS Antilock Brake System ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking Safe steering response is maintained even during full braking Active safety is thus increased The ABS is operational every time you start the engine Braking safely refer to page 136 CBC Cornering Brake Control When braking during curves or when braking during a lane change driving stability and steer ing response are improved further Electronic brake force distribution The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly this system produces maximum braking force boosting and thus helps to achieve the shortest possible braking distance during full braking maneuvers This system exploits all of the benefits p
302. raint 126 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Closing 1 Foldthe rear backrest into the seating posi tion and engage FN When you return the seat to its upright position make sure that the catch engages properly If it is not properly engaged transported cargo could enter the vehicle dur ing braking or evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occupants 4 2 Release the latch plate from the bracket on the rear window shelf and insert it into the buckle of the center safety belt Make sure the latch plate audibly engages The lashing eyes in the cargo bay provide you with a way to attach cargo bay nets or luggage straps for securing suitcases and luggage refer to page 138 Sports Wagon cargo bay Roll up cover Pull out the roll up cover and hook it into the brackets A Do not place heavy or hard objects on the roll up cover If you do so they may pose a danger to vehicle occupants during braking or evasive maneuvers Do not allow the roll up cover to snap back oth erwise it can be damaged 4 Manual roll up cover When opening the tailgate or rear window the roll up cover is raised Before closing the tail gate and rear window press down the roll up cover until it engages Automatic roll up cover When the tailgate or rear window are opened the roll up cover is raised and when the tailgate and rear window are closed it is lowered Make sure that the closi
303. ral seconds for the system to scan the data from the DVD Removing navigation DVD 1 Press El button 1 The DVD emerges slightly from the drive 2 Remove the DVD If the DVD is not ejected from the drive it is pos sible that it is blocked In this case a message Is also shown on the Control Display 142 Display in assistance window You can display the route or the current position in the assistance window This display remains visible even if you change to another applica tion 1 Move the controller to the right to enter the assistance window i bragt i KLOP 6975 TEADE 3 100 5 2 Press the controller Other menu items are displayed 3 Select the desired route view or Current position 1 10 5 FELGE 23 anne hare Pa y 3 04 3 B HLS 4 Press the controller Displaying arrow view in map view If the navigation system suggests a change of direction the arrow view is briefly displayed 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 4 Turn the controller until Language Units is selected and press the controller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Languages is selected and press the controller At a glance 6 Select Arrow display pop up instructions
304. re driving use the hands free system instead If you do not observe this precaution your being distracted can endanger vehicle occupants and other road users 4 194 Suitable mobile phones Ask your BMW center which mobile phones with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the mobile phone preparation package or which mobile phones snap in adapters are available for These mobile phones support the functions described in this Owner s Manual with a certain software version Malfunctions can occur with other mobile phones Care instructions You can find valuable information on this topic under Care starting on page 239 and the oper ating instructions for the mobile phone Operating options You can operate the mobile phone using gt Buttons on steering wheel refer to page 11 gt iDrive refer to page 16 gt Voice commands refer to page 205 gt Programmable memory buttons refer to page 21 Avoid operating a mobile phone detected by the vehicle with the keypad of the mobile phone otherwise malfunctions can occur Placing phone calls with BMW Assist system BMW Assist calls You can use the BMW Assist system via the hands free unit for BMW Assist calls When the status information BMW Assist or BMW Service is displayed in Communica tion only BMW Assist calls are possible It may not be possible to establish a telephone connection using the mobile phone while a con nection is being established to
305. refer to page 38 1 Depress brake pedal 2 Press the Start Stop button Switching off engine When leaving the vehicle always take the remote control with you When parking firmly apply the handbrake as otherwise the vehicle could roll 4 Manual transmission 1 Press the Start Stop button with the vehicle stopped 2 Shift into first gear or reverse 3 Firmly apply the handbrake 4 Remove the remote control from the igni tion lock refer to page 61 Automatic and sport automatic transmission 1 Shift transmission into position P with the vehicle stopped 2 Press the Start Stop button 3 Firmly apply the handbrake 4 Remove the remote control from the igni tion lock refer to page 61 Before driving into a car wash The vehicle can roll if you proceed according to the following steps 1 With comfort access insert the remote con trol into the ignition lock Depress brake pedal Shift into transmission position N 4 Switch off the engine Transmission position P will be engaged gt after approx 30 seconds Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG gt if you remove the remote control from the ignition lock Handbrake The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked it brakes the rear wheels Indicator lamp The indicator lamp lights up and a sig RAKE nal also sounds when starting off The handbrake is applied
306. refer to page 54 gt Displays on Control Display gt Brightness of the Control Display refer to page 87 gt Measuring units for consumption route distances temperature and pressure refer to page 88 V 12h 24h clock format refer to page 87 V Date format refer to page 87 gt Language on Control Display refer to page 88 gt Lighting settings gt Triple turn signal activation refer to page 67 gt Welcome lamps refer to page 107 V Pathway lighting refer to page 108 gt Daytime running lamps refer to page 108 gt High beam assistant refer to page 109 gt PDC Park Distance Control optical warn ing refer to page 89 gt Head Up Display selection and bright ness of display refer to page 101 gt BMW Night Vision display settings refer to page 104 gt Automatic climate control AUTO program and intensity cooling function and auto matic recirculated air control recirculated air mode temperature air distribution tem perature in the upper body region refer to text starting on page 114 v i O gt Navigation system voice instructions for destination guidance refer to page 159 In addition the following most recently selected settings are recalled during unlocking gt Programmable memory buttons selecting stored functions refer to page 21 gt Positions of driver s seat outside mirrors and steering wheel refer to page 47
307. remote control out of the ignition lock using force as otherwise damage may result 4 Before removing the remote control first press it in as far as possible to release the locking device The ignition is switched off if it was still switched on Automatic and sport automatic transmission The remote control can only be removed when transmission position P is selected interlock Start Stop button 7S i Di Pressing the Start Stop button switches the radio readiness or the ignition on and off m The engine is started when you press the Start Stop button and depress the clutch if the car has manual transmission or the brake if the car has automatic transmission 4 Radio readiness Some electronic systems consumers are ready for operation The time and outside tempera ture are displayed in the instrument cluster Radio readiness is switched off gt when the remote control is removed from the ignition lock gt with comfort access by touching the sur face on the door handle refer to Locking on page 39 Ignition on All electronic systems consumers are ready for operation The odometer and the trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster refer to page 78 gt Please switch off the ignition and the electronic systems consumers which are not required when the engine Is not running to save the battery 4 61 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG
308. required Screw in the remaining lug bolts Tighten all the bolts securely in a diagonal pattern Lower the vehicle and remove the jack from beneath the vehicle After mounting iv Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern To ensure safety always have the lug bolts checked with a calibrated torque wrench as soon as possible to ensure that they are tightened to the speci fied torque Otherwise incorrectly tight ened lug bolts are a hidden safety risk The tightening torque is 88 5 Ib ft 120 Nm lt 4 When stowing the wheel and tools in the vehicle execute these steps in the reverse order Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 3 Check and correct the tire inflation pressure at the earliest opportunity gt Protect valve stems with valve stem seal caps against dirt and contamina tion Dirt in valve stems is a frequent source of gradual air loss 4 4 Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor refer to page 94 orreset the Tire Pressure Monitor refer to page 96 5 Replace the damaged tire as soon as possi ble and have the new wheel tire balanced Driving with compact wheel Drive reservedly and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h The driving characteristics change for example reduced track stability on braking extended braking distance and altered self steering characteristics in the limit range In conjunction with winter tires these characteristics are more pronounced
309. ressure using asponge ora washing brush gt Before cleaning the windshield deacti _ vate the rain sensor or switch off the igni tion to prevent unwanted wiper operation 4 ga Follow local guidelines for washing vehi ES cles by hand lt Headlamps Do not rub dry and never use abrasives or strong solvents to clean the covers Loosen dirt e g insects with shampoo or insect remover and wash away with plenty of water Use a window de icer to remove accumulated ice and snow not a scraper Windows Use a glass cleaner to clean the inside and out side surfaces of the windows and the glass sur faces of the mirrors l Do not use quartz containing cleansers _ to clean glass surfaces of the mirrors lt 4 Wiper blades Clean with soapy water and replace regularly to prevent streaking gt The presence of wax and sealant residues _ and dirt on the windows leads to streaking during wiper operation and results in premature wear on wiper blades as well as interference with the rain sensor lt 240 Caring for the vehicle finish Regular care helps your vehicle retain its value and protects the paint from the long term effects of aggressive substances Regionally occurring environmental factors can affect and damage vehicle finish It is therefore important to tailor the frequency and extent of your Car care accordingly Immediately remove particularly aggressive substances such as spilled fuel oil grease
310. rn the locks to the left and fold down the trim 2 Fold down the foam insulation 248 3 Pull out the bulb holder for the backup lamp 1 or brake lamp 2 downward 1 2 4 Backup lamp remove the bulb for replace ment Brake lamp apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement Changing wheels A Safety precautions in the event of a flat tire or wheel change park the vehicle as far as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground Switch on the hazard warning flashers Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the imme diate area in a safe place such as behind a guardrail Ifa warning triangle or portable hazard warning lamp is required set it up on the roadside at an appropriate distance from the rear of the vehi cle Comply with all safety guidelines and regu lations Change the wheel only on a level firm surface which is not slippery The vehicle or the jack could slip to the side if you attempt to raise the vehicle on a soft or slippery surface such as snow ice tiles etc Position the jack on a firm support surface Do not use awooden block or similar object as a support base for the jack as this would prevent it from extending to its full support height and reduce its load carrying capacity To avoid serious or fatal injury never lie under the vehicle and never start the engine while it is supported by the j
311. rogrammable Memory Keys and press the controller fa Die Delete assignment of all memory keys 6 Select Delete assignment of all memory keys and press the controller 7 Acknowledge with Yes Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Voice command system The concept The voice command system allows you to con trol operation of various vehicle systems with out taking your hands off the steering wheel Individual menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands This frees you of having to use the controller The voice command system transforms your oral commands into control signals for the selected systems and provides support in the form of instructions or questions The voice command system uses a special microphone located in the area of the interior rearview mirror refer to page 14 Precondition Via iDrive set the language that applies for the voice command system in order to enable iden tification of the spoken commands To set the language of iDrive refer to page 88 Symbols in Owner s Manual we Say the specified commands word for word t Indicates responses of the voice command system Voice commands Activating voice command system 1 Press the f button ty This symbol on the Control Display and an acoustic signal tell you that the voice command system can respond to com mands Climate 2 Say the command Th
312. roller Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 4 Select Steering wheel buttons and press 6 Select the button if necessary and press the the controller controller v Steering wheel buttons Navigation voice instructions Star button 7 voice Instructions Air recirculation on off Iy Dimana butan tion on off Mute on off Mute on off A Monitor on off Monitor on off Telephone list Telephone list HDC on off HDC on off O A list of different functions appears You can operate the selected function using the gt Navigation voice instructions corresponding button Voice instructions for the navigation system Operating function gt Air recirculation on off Press the corresponding button on the steering Permanently shutting off outside air wheel refer to AUC Automatic recirculated air If you have programmed Navigation voice control on page 116 instructions for one of the buttons gt Mute on off gt To switch voice instructions on off Mutes the audio sources press button longer gt Monitor on off gt To repeat the last voice instruction Switches the Control Display on off Press the button gt Telephone list Display hide phone book or last list of stored phone numbers gt HDC on off Switches HDC Hill Descent Control on off gt Next entertainment source Changes audio source gt Night Vision on off Switches BMW Night Vision on off 5 Select the des
313. roller PDC Lighting Central locking All doors After door opened Unlock button Last seat pos iO Relock door if not opened O Lock after driving 6 Select Central locking and press the con troller 7 Select Last seat pos and press the con troller 8 Select After unlocking or After door opened 4 Door locks Central locking Deactivated as Will doors eactivated pened After do O Lock after driving or opened 9 Press the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG To cancel the request Select Deactivated and press the controller Head restraints A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident Adjust the head restraint so that its center EN IS approximately at ear level Otherwise there is increased danger of injury in the event of an accident Only remove the head restraints if no one will be sitting on the seat in question Reinstall the head restraints before transport ing passengers as otherwise the head restraint cannot provide its protective function Active front head restraints In the event of a rear end collision of sufficient severity the active head restraint reduces the distance to the head Do not use seat covers or head restraint EN covers that could impede the proper functioning of the active head restraint Other wise there is no assurance that the active head r
314. rovided by ABS Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Adaptive brake assistant In conjunction with the active cruise control with the stop and go function the adaptive brake assistant ensures that the brake responds even more quickly during braking with the brake assistant DSC Dynamic Stability Control DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when starting off and accelerating The system also identifies unstable driving conditions such as a loss of traction at the rear of the vehicle or sliding of the vehicle in its front wheels In these cases DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe course within physical limits by reducing engine output and through braking actions in the indi vidual wheels A The laws of physics cannot be repealed even with DSC An appropriate driving style always remains the responsibility of the driver Therefore do not restrict the additional safety margin with a risky driving style as other wise there is a risk of an accident 4 Deactivating DSC Press the button until the DSC indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up but not longer than approx 10 seconds DTC Dynamic Trac tion Control and DSC are deactivated together Stabilizing and drive output promoting actions are no longer executed In addition the stability promoting intervention of the active steering
315. rse fast CD changer 185 CD player 185 Reverse gear automatic transmission with Steptronic 64 manual transmission 63 Road map 158 Roadside Assistance 204 210 Roadside Assistance 254 Roadside assistance 210 Roadside parking lamps 109 replacing bulbs 245 Roller blind refer to Sun blinds 121 Roll up cover Sports Wagon 127 Roof load capacity 263 Roof mounted luggage rack 139 Rope refer to Tow starting and towing 255 Rotary pushbutton refer to iDrive 16 Route 154 bypassing sections 160 changing 160 changing criteria 154 displaying 157 displaying arrow display 157 displaying map view 158 displaying streets or towns cities 159 selecting 154 Route information refer to Destination guidance with voice instructions 159 Route map refer to Displaying map view 158 Route preference changing 154 Route selection 154 RSC Runflat System Component refer to Run flat tires 229 Run flat tires 229 continuing driving with a damaged tire 95 97 flat tire 95 97 Flat Tire Monitor 94 new wheels and tires 229 tire inflation pressure 95 97 222 Tire Pressure Monitor 96 tire replacement 229 230 winter tires 230 S Safety 5 Safety belts 50 damage 51 sitting safely 45 warning lamp 50 Safety belt tensioners refer to Airbags 99 refer to Safety belts 50 Safety systems ABS
316. rvice life Therefore check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace the contents concerned in good time if necessary Sedan The first aid kit is located in the luggage com partment lid 254 Loosen the wing nut to open Sports Wagon The first aid kit is located in the right side panel of the cargo bay Before opening the side panel pull the retaining strap toward the rear by its rear end and unhook it Roadside Assistance The Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group offers you assistance in the event of a break down around the clock including on weekends and public holidays The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis tance in your home country can be found in the Contact brochure With BMW Assist you can contact the Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group for assistance in the event of a breakdown directly via iDrive refer to page 210 Jump starting When your battery is discharged you can use two jumper cables to start your BMW with power from the battery in a second vehicle You can also use the same method to help start another vehicle Use only jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine is running Care fully adhere to the following sequence both to prevent damage to one or both vehicles and to guard against possible personal injuries lt Online Editio
317. s Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting e g do not lift the vehi cle by the tow fitting Otherwise damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur 4 Access to screw thread Press the arrow symbol on the cover in the bumper Front Rear Being towed Make sure that the ignition is switched on EN refer to page 61 otherwise the low beams tail lamps turn signals and windshield wipers would not be available Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle raised as otherwise the steering can turn to the left or right When the engine is stopped there is no power assist 256 This then requires increased effort for braking and steering Active steering is deactivated and larger steering wheel movements are required lt Switch on the hazard warning flashers depend ing on the local regulations If the electrical sys tem fails mark the vehicle to be towed e g with a sign or warning triangle in the rear window Manual transmission Gearshift lever in neutral position Automatic and sport automatic transmission Before towing manually release the transmission lock even if there is no mal function in the transmission Otherwise there is arisk that the transmission lock will engage dur ing towing 4 Manually unlocking and locking transmission lock refer to page 65 Do not exceed a towing speed of mph 70 km h and a towing distance of 90 miles 150 km otherwise the automatic transmission may be damaged
318. selected gt Map facing north gt Map direction of travel gt Perspective 4 M Navigation New destination e SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY W Route preference Map direction of I 158 3 Press the controller BEVERLYHILLS Se _ WEST HOLLYWOOD 1 Switching voice instructions on off 2 Starting ending destination guidance 3 Map guided destination selection 4 Displaying the menu in which the informa tion last selected can be displayed hidden refer to Selecting destination via informa tion on page 149 5 Changing map display gt An Map facing north gt Y Map direction of travel gt A Perspective 6 Changing route criteria 7 Manually displaying traffic information 8 Arrow to destination from a bird s eye view The estimated time of arrival and the distance to the destination are shown in the bottom line of the Control Display To exit the menu 4 Select the arrow and press the controller At scales of less than 250 miles 500 km you have the option of deciding whether to orient the map to north or toward your current direc tion of travel At scales of 250 miles 500 km or greater the map always points toward north Changing map display AV AN Select the corresponding symbol and press the controller The next map display is displayed Changing scale Turn the controller to adjust the scale Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02
319. sk of causing an accident In the event of pressure loss vehicle handling changes This includes reduced tracking stability in braking extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while the vehicle is being driven this can indicate final failure of the damaged tire Reduce speed and stop at a suitable location as soon as possible otherwise pieces of the tire could become detached and cause an accident Do not con tinue driving but instead contact your BMW center 4 95 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Technology for comfort convenience and safety TPM Tire Pressure Monitor The concept TPM checks the tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires The system reports when the tire inflation pressure has dropped consid erably in one or several tires Functional requirement In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire the system must be reset at the correct tire inflation pressure Always use wheels with TPM electronics oth erwise fault free operation of the system is not ensured Reset the system again after each correc tion of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change 4 System limits TPM cannot announce sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences The system does not function properly if it has not been reset e g a flat tire is reported despite corre
320. smitter uses an alter nating code system To do so either read the instructions for the original hand held transmit ter or hold down the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote control flashes rapidly for a short time and then remains lit for approx 2 seconds this indicates that the original hand held transmitter uses an alternating code system In the case of an alternating code system program the mem ory buttons 1 as described at Alternating code hand held transmitters 4 Alternating code hand held transmitters To program the integrated universal remote control consult the operating instructions for the equipment to be set You will find informa tion there on the possibilities for synchroniza tion When programming hand held transmitters that employ an alternating code please observe the following supplementary instructions gt Programming will be easier with the aid of a second person lt 4 1 Park your vehicle within the range of the remote controlled device 2 Program the integrated universal remote control as described above in the section Fixed code hand held transmitters 3 Locate the button on the receiver of the device to be set e g on the drive unit 4 Press the button on the receiver of the device to be set After step 4 you have approx 30 seconds for step 5 5 Press the programmed memory button 1 of the inte
321. st the first three letters of the destination The more letters you say the more exactly the system recognizes the town city O 2 gt Z The system can suggest up to 20 destina tions that match your entries Up to 6 entries are displayed at once on the Con trol Display al 2 BEVERLY HILLS CALIFORNIA 3 BEVERLY HILLS FLORIDA 4 BEVERLY HILLS MICHIGAN 5 BEVERLY HILLS MISSOURI 6 BEVERLY HILLS TEXAS we destination is suggested by the system 2 Select town city gt Select highlighted town city Yes gt Select other town city Not gt Select entry e g Entry 34 gt To show other entries in the list Next page gt To respell the town city Repeat 147 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Destination entry The town city can also be selected from the list via iDrive Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller Entering the destination as an entire word Towns cities and streets located in the region where the language of the voice command sys tem is spoken can be entered as an entire word Example to enter a US destination as an entire word the system language must be English Speak smoothly and at normal volume avoiding excessive emphasis and pauses 1 Wait for the system to request the destina tion wt 2 Say the name of the destination The system can suggest up to 6 destina
322. stimated time of arrival at destination and remaining distance gt Entering a distance manually in the com puter see below gt Entering a destination in the navigation system refer to page 144 gt Cruising range gt Average speed gt Average fuel consumption Resetting values You can reset the values for the average speed and average fuel consumption 1 Select the respective menu item and press the controller 2 Toconfirm your selection press the con troller again Entering a distance manually 1 Select Distance to dest and press the controller Car Data 4 Onboard info Arrival time Range Distance to dest Speed Consumption 2 Turnthe controller to select the distance to your destination 3 Press the controller to apply the setting The distance is automatically preset during the destination guidance of the navigation sys tem Trip computer The trip computer is suitable for example for a vacation trip 1 Open the start menu 2 Open Navigation Without navigation system Open Car Data 80 7 online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 3 Select Car Data and press the controller 4 Select Trip computer and press the con troller D Car Data Onboard info Set 4 10 pm 05 40 hr 279 mis 485 mph 23 0 mpg Departure Duration Distance traveled Consumption Departure time Driving time Distance traveled Av
323. supply of outside air The system then recircu lates the air currently within the vehicle During AUC operation a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shut off auto matically By pressing the button repeatedly you can request three operating modes gt LED off outside air flows in continuously gt Right LED on AUC mode the system detects pollutants in the outside air and shuts off the supply as needed gt Left LED on recirculated air mode the supply of outside air is permanently shut off A Should the windows fog up in the recircu lated air mode press the AUTO button or switch off the recirculated air mode and increase the air volume if necessary The recirculated air mode should not be used over an extended period of time as the air qual ity inside the vehicle deteriorates continu ously lt Residual heat The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the passenger com partment e g while stopped at a school to pick up a child 1 Switch off the engine 2 Turnto the right refer to arrow The function can be switched on when the fol lowing conditions are met gt upto 15 minutes after switching off the engine gt with engine at operating temperature Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG gt with sufficient battery voltage gt atan outside temperature below 77 F 25 C From radio readiness the interior temperature the air
324. system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions such as very thin objects and the sunroof would con tinue closing 4 Closing without pinch protection system In case of danger from outside slide the switch forward beyond the resistance point and hold The roof closes without the pinch protection system Following interruptions in electrical power supply After a power loss the sunroof may only respond to the raise command Then have the system initialized BMW recommends having this work done by your BMW center Moving manually In the event of an electrical malfunction you can move the glass sunroof manually 42 1 Fold the cover panel down if necessary using a screwdriver from the onboard tool kit refer to page 243 2 Insert the Allen wrench from the onboard tool kit refer to page 243 into the opening provided Move the glass sunroof in the desired direction The arrow below indi cates the rotation direction for closing Sports Wagon Panorama glass sunroof The panorama glass sunroof is ready for opera tion with the ignition switched on refer to page 61 To prevent injuries exercise care when closing the panorama glass sunroof and keep it in your field of vision until it is closed Always take along the remote control when you leave the vehicle otherwise children could for Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG example operate the roof and injure them se
325. t The window continues to open as long as you keep the switch pressed gt Press switch beyond resistance point The window opens automatically Pressing the switch again stops the opening move ment You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch Separate switches for the rear windows are located in the rear For information on using the convenient opera tion at the door lock or with the remote control refer to page 30 or 32 For information on comfort closing with comfort access refer to page 39 After switching off ignition You can still operate the windows with the remote control removed or the ignition switched off for approx 1 minute as long as neither of the front doors has been opened Pinch protection system If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes the closing action is interrupted and the window reopens slightly Despite the pinch protection system inspect the window s travel path prior to closing it as the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions such as thin objects and the window would continue closing Do not install any accessories in the range of movement of the windows otherwise the pinch protection system will be impaired lt Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Closing without pinch protection system In case of danger from outside or if for example ice on the window prevents normal
326. t no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Front passenger airbags deactivating 100 Front seat adjustment 46 FTM 95 FTM refer to Flat Tire Monitor 94 Fuel 221 average consumption 80 display 79 high quality brands 221 quality 221 specifications 221 tank contents refer to Capacities 264 Fuel clock refer to Fuel gauge 79 Fuel consumption display computer average fuel consumption 80 Fuel display refer to Fuel gauge 79 Fuel efficient driving refer to Energy control 79 refer to Saving fuel 134 Fuel filler door 220 releasing in the event of electrical malfunction 220 Full mobile phone preparation package 194 Full screen display refer to Switching assistance window off 21 Full screen with BMW Night Vision 105 Fuses 252 G Garage door opener refer to Integrated universal remote control 120 Gasoline refer to Required fuel 221 Gasoline display refer to Fuel gauge 79 Gearshift lever manual transmission 63 General driving notes 134 135 Glass sunroof electric 41 convenient operation from outside 32 convenient operation with comfort access 39 moving manually 42 remote control 30 Glove compartment 122 flashlight 122 lighting 122 GPS navigation refer to Navigation system 142 Grills refer to Ventilation 117 Gross vehicle weight refer to Weights 263 H Halogen lamps 245 Handbrake 63 indicator lamp 13 63
327. t no longer holds the vehicle after approx 2 seconds and your vehicle will start to roll backward 4 Dynamic Drive The concept Dynamic Drive minimizes body roll and opti mizes vehicle stability during cornering and evasive maneuvers Dynamic Drive is based on active stabilizers on the front and rear axles Suspension compli ance adapts to suit driving conditions varying from performance oriented during cornering to smooth and comfort oriented when the vehicle IS proceeding in a straight line During vehicle operation the system continuously runs through closed loop control cycles lasting only fractions of a second The system assumes operational status each time you start the engine 93 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Technology for comfort convenience and safety Sports Wagon self leveling suspension Malfunction The warning lamp for self leveling sus cto pension lights up yellow and amessage is shown on the Control Display A mal function has occurred in the self leveling sus pension Stop and check the vehicle If it is con siderably lower at the rear than at the front and possibly also on one side rear left compared to rear right go to the nearest BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per sonnel Drive with appropriate caution in the meantime The vehicle has reduced ground clearance and driving comfort may
328. t without entering destination You can also enter a street without entering a destination In this case all streets of the entered country are offered for selection 146 The related town city is displayed after the street name Ifa town city has already been entered you can undo this entry This may be practical if the desired street does not exist in the entered des tination because for example it belongs to another part of the town city 1 Change to upper field 45 The arrow is selected BEVERLY HILLS RR ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO POR STU VW Street ABINGTON DR ACRES DR GREEN ALANDA PI ALDBURY CT 2 Turn the controller to the right until the request for the entry of a street in the coun try appears and press the controller Enterstreet name in CALIFORNIA ABC DEF GHIJKL MNO POR STU VW Street ABINGTON DR ACRES DR GREEN ALANDA PI ALDBURY CT 3 Change to the second field from the top and enter the street Entering house number All house numbers stored for the street on the navigation DVD can be entered 1 Select House number and press the con troller 2 Enter the house number Select the desired digits and press the con troller 3 Change into the third field from the top Turn the controller until the house number is selected and press the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Starting destination guidance with
329. telephones including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna or transceiver equipment such as CBs walkie talkies ham radios or the like may cause extensive damage to the vehicle compromise its safety interfere with the vehi cle s electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty See your BMW center for additional information lt 4 Mm Maintenance replacement or repair of _ the emission control devices and sys tems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any cer tified automotive part lt California Proposition 65 Warning California law requires us to issue the following warning Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts including components found in the interior fur nishings in a vehicle contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Battery posts terminals and related accesso ries contain lead and lead compounds Wash your hands after handling Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water lt
330. than 25 minutes Speech quality If the person you are talking to cannot under stand you well this may be due to excessively loud background noises The full mobile phone preparation package can compensate for these noises to a certain degree 200 To optimize the speech quality during a call we recommend that you gt Reduce background noises e g by closing the windows reducing the air volume of the automatic climate control or pointing the opened front vent outlets downward gt Reduce volume of hands free system Requirements gt The logon data of the mobile phone are stored in the vehicle and the mobile phone is ready to operate gt The engine is running or the ignition is switched on gt The mobile phone is detected by the vehi cle Opening Communication You operate many of the functions described in the following via the Communication menu iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button to open the start menu Communication fh Navigation Climate Entertainment 2 Move the controller forward to open Com munication Receiving calls If you have the phone number of the caller stored in the phone book and the phone num ber has been transmitted the name of the entry is displayed Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Press the gf button on the steering wheel Alternative Accept is selected Press the c
331. the radio 172 174 AUX 168 187 188 AUX In connection 187 AUX IN in audio mode 187 Average fuel consumption 80 setting units 88 Average speed refer to Computer 79 Avoid ferries in navigation 154 Avoid highways in navigation 154 Avoiding freeways for navigation 154 Avoiding unintentional alarms 38 Avoid tollroads in navigation 154 Axle loads refer to Weights 263 A Z 202 Backrest contour refer to Lumbar support 47 Backrests refer to Seats 46 Backrest width adjustment 46 Back seats refer to Rear seats Backup lamps replacing bulbs 246 Balance refer to Tone control 170 Band aids refer to First aid kit 254 Bass refer to Tone control 169 Bass Tone control 170 Battery refer to Vehicle battery 251 jump starting 254 Battery replacement remote control for comfort access 40 BC button refer to Computer 79 Being towed 256 Belts refer to Safety belts 50 Beverage holder refer to Cup holders 124 Blower refer to Air volume 115 Bluetooth 195 BMW Assist 210 211 271 3 S Lu O Gen 3 ad Everything from A to Z BMW Assist 209 activating 215 BMW TeleServices 211 concierge service 212 contacting BMW Customer Relations 212 displaying vehicle data 216 offered services 209 roadside assistance 210 updating 214 BMW Assist My Info 213 BMW Car Shampoo 241 BMW Contact 204 BMW Contact Numbers
332. the fuel vapor recovery system The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time Fuel tank capacity Approx 18 5 US gal 70 liters including the reserve capacity of approx 2 1 US gal 8 liters 550i approx 2 6 US gal 10 liters reserve Capacity Refuel as soon as possible once your EN cruising range falls below 30 miles 50 km otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur 4 Fuel filler cap Closing Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click FN Do not crush the band attached to the cap otherwise the cap may not properly seal and fuel vapors can escape 4 A message is displayed if the cap is loose or missing Fuel specifications Do not use leaded gasoline otherwise permanent damage to the catalytic con verter will result Do not use E85 i e fuel that consists of 85 ethanol or Flex Fuel Otherwise permanent damage to the engine and the fuel supply sys tem will result Required fuel Super Premium Gasoline AKI 91 This gasoline is highly recommended However you may also use gasoline with less AKI The minimum AKI Rating is 87 If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat ing the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures This has no affect on the engine life Do not use gasoline below the specified minimum quality otherwise engine dam age can result 4 Use high quality brands Field e
333. the system may not detect vehicles driving ahead if they suddenly brake heavily in stop and go traffic during accelera tion The system will not apply the brakes or slow your vehicle when a very slow moving vehicle stopped vehicle or stationary object is in the lane ahead of you for example when approaching a traffic light or parked vehicle or when a vehicle is stalled in your lane Also the system does not react to oncoming traffic pedestrians or other types of potential traffic such as arider ona horseback It is also possible that the system may not detect smaller moving objects such as motorcycles or bicycles Be especially alert when encountering any of these 15 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG iving Dr situations as the system will neither automati cally brake nor provide a warning to you Also be aware that every decrease in the distance setting allows your vehicle to come closer to a vehicle in front of you and requires a heightened amount of alertness 4 The system cannot allow the vehicle to drive off automatically in situations that make driving off considerably more difficult e g on steep uphill grades with a heavy trailer or before raised areas in the road Near radio astronomy stations the system radar is deactivated at soeeds under 20 mph 30 km h due to legal regulations Be certain to interrupt the system when you pull into an exit lane for a highway offramp lt 4
334. tion WB Weather Band station SAT satellite radio CD CD player or CD changer AUX AUX In connection USB audio interface Set depending on the audio source other adjustments can be made e g with the radio update station with strongest VV VV VV y 168 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG reception store station tone control sam ple stations From another menu you can change ea directly to the screen last displayed refer to Comfort opening of menu items page 18 4 From radio readiness the selected audio source is stored for the remote control currently In use Switching on off To switch the Entertainment sound output on and off Press knob 1 next to the CD player mj This symbol on the Control Display indi cates that sound output is switched off For a single drive the sound output Is available for approx 20 minutes with the ignition switched off Switch on the sound output again for this pur pose Adjusting volume Turn knob 1 next to the CD player until the desired volume is set You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel refer to page 11 From radio readiness the setting is stored for the remote control currently in use Tone control You can alter various tone settings e g treble and bass or the speed dependent volume increase The tone settings are set for all audio sources at once From radio readiness the
335. tion options with navigation system 154 284 Selector lever automatic transmission with Steptronic 63 64 Selector lever lock refer to Selecting transmission positions 64 Self leveling suspension 94 Service refer to Roadside Assistance 254 Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models 237 Service Info 81 211 234 Service Interval Display refer to CBS Condition Based Service 237 refer to Service requirements 81 Service Request 204 211 Service requirements 82 211 234 Service requirements 81 refer to CBS Condition Based Service 237 Set in audio mode 168 on trip computer 81 Set date 87 Set service date 82 Set time 87 Setting button refer to Controls controller 16 Settings 216 in unlocking 30 with BMW Assist 214 Settings BMW Night Vision 104 changing on Control Display 86 clock 12h 24h mode 87 configuring refer to Personal Profile 28 date 87 language 88 units of measure 88 Settings menu refer to i menu 17 Setting time refer to Preselecting activation times 118 Shifting gears Automatic transmission with Steptronic 64 Shift paddles on steering wheel 66 Short commands of voice command system 265 Short route in navigation 154 Short route in navigation refer to Selecting route 154 Shoulder support 46 Show current position 149 Show destination position 149 Shuffled refer to
336. tiously remove any debris ice or snow To avoid dam age to the lens do not use sharp or abrasive instruments to clean ice snow or dirt off the lens When the windshield is cleaned with the head lamps on the camera lens area is automatically sprayed as well Refer to page 68 Leaving lane warning The concept This system warns you from a speed of approx 40 mph 70 km h when the vehicle is leaving the lane you are currently in on roads with lane limit lines You feel this due to a slight vibration of the steering wheel The system does not warn you if you signal before leaving the lane It is best to use the system on well developed roads and freeways Switching on off W see ff f N es lt a F x 1 _X Su D eT Press the button on the steering wheel z gt The two lines 1 indicate that the system is activated gt The two arrows 2 mean that the system has detected one or two lane limit lines from a speed of approx 40 mph 70 km h and warns accordingly If you activate the system below a speed of approx 40 mph 70 km h a message will appear 105 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG AL fe io ra lt e Technology for comfort convenience and safety stating that the system is not active until this speed is reached A warning will be canceled gt after approx 3 seconds gt if you return to your lane gt if you brake he
337. tly engaged 63 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Engaging transmission position gt Do not leave the transmission position P until the engine is running interlock iving gt With the vehicle stationary depress the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N otherwise the shift command will not be executed shiftlock Dr To prevent the vehicle from creeping EN after you select a driving position maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start lt Engaging N D R Briefly press the selector lever in the desired direction beyond a resistance point if neces sary Press button 1 simultaneously out of P or into R The engaged transmission position is also dis played on the selector lever The selector lever immediately returns to the center position when released Engaging P z a ua Press button P R Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary 64 P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary The rear wheels are locked gt P is engaged as soon as you switch off the engine unless N is engaged and with comfort access the remote control is inserted in the ignition lock refer to Before driving into a car wash page 62 4 N Neutral Can for example be engaged in automatic car washes The vehicle can roll gt N remains engaged even after the engine is switched off whenever you leave the remote control in t
338. to find what you need in this Owner s Manual as quickly as possible The fastest way to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed index at the back of the manual If you wish to gain an initial overview of your vehicle you will find this in the first chapter Should you sell your BMW some day please remember to hand over the Owner s Manual as well it is an important component of your vehicle Additional sources of information Should you have any other questions your BMW center will be happy to advise you You can find information on BMW e g on tech nology on the Internet at www bmwusa com Symbols used Indicates precautions that must be fol lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos sibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle 4 gt Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle lt Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment 4 lt Marks the end of a specific item of informa tion Indicates special equipment country spe cific equipment and optional extras as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing a Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions gt Verbal instructions to use with the voice command system Identifies the answers generated by the voice command system
339. to open the menu Turn the controller until Settings is selected and press the controller Select Audio and press the controller Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Reset is selected and press the controller a salizer Surround Settings With two drives select Yes 171 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Radio Radio Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM wavebands Listening to radio Press the knob if the sound output is switched off iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Move the controller backwards to open Entertainment 3 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until FM or AM is selected AM WB SAT Presets 1103 5 299 3 TA 3 WNYC 7 KROQ T f 494 4 B 100 5 4 Press the controller Stations are shown on the Control Display on the basis of various selection criteria e g Pre sets If Autostore does not display any stations or if the stations displayed can no longer be received to update the station with the stron gest signal refer to page 174 172 Changing stations 7 FM i Presets Turn the controller In addition to the stations currently displayed you can have stations with another selection criterion displayed Professional radio You can choose from the following s
340. to the negative terminal of the battery or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started Starting engine 1 Start the engine on the assisting vehicle and allow it to run at idle for several minutes at slightly increased speed 2 Start the engine on the other vehicle in the usual way If the first starting attempt is not successful wait a few minutes before another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge 3 Let the engines run for a few minutes 4 Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing the connection sequence Check the battery and recharge if necessary gt Never use spray fluids to start the 1 engine Tow starting and towing Observe applicable laws and regulations for tow starting and towing lt 4 Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being towed 4 gt z O Using tow fitting Always keep the screw in tow fitting with the vehicle It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW 255 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG istance iving and receiving ass G Sedan It is located in the toolkit in the luggage com partment lid refer to page 243 Sports Wagon It is located in the toolkit behind the left side panel in the cargo bay refer to page 243 A Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in Use the tow fitting for towing only on road
341. touch hot exhaust tail pipes Otherwise there is a risk of burns 4 Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads reduce road speed If you do not a wedge of water can form between tires and road sur face This phenomenon is referred to as hydro planing and is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and 135 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Things to remember when driving the road surface ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle lt The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread depth of the tires decreases refer also to Mini mum tire tread on page 229 Driving through water Do not drive through water on the road if it is deeper than 1 ft 30 cm and then only at walking speed at the most Otherwise the vehi cle s engine the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged lt Using handbrake on inclines On inclines do not hold the vehicle in place for a long time by riding the clutch use the handbrake Otherwise greater clutch wear will result 4 Braking safely Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard feature In situations that require it it is best to brake with full force Since the vehicle maintains steering responsiveness you can still avoid possible obstacles with a minimum of steering effort Pulsation of the brake pedal combined with sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS
342. trol 31 Interior motion sensor 38 switching off 38 Interior rearview mirror 53 automatic dimming feature 54 Intermittent mode of the wipers 68 J Jacking points 250 Joystick refer to iDrive 16 Jumpering refer to Jump starting 254 Jump starting 254 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG K Keyless Go refer to Comfort access 38 Keyless opening and closing refer to Comfort access 38 Key Memory refer to Personal Profile 28 Keypad 204 Keys 28 key related settings refer to Personal Profile 28 spare key 28 Kick down Automatic transmission with Steptronic 64 Knock control 221 L Lamps refer to High beam assistant 109 refer to Parking lamps low beams 107 Lamps and bulbs 244 Lane limit lines refer to Leaving lane warning 105 Language Units 88 in navigation 143 159 Languages 88 in navigation 143 159 Lashing eyes refer to Securing cargo 138 Last destinations refer to Destination list 150 Last seat pos 48 LATCH child restraint fixing system 57 Leather care 241 Leaving lane warning 105 LEDs light emitting diodes 244 Length refer to Dimensions 261 License plate lamp replacing bulbs 248 Light emitting diodes LEDs 244 Lighter 124 Lighting 67 Lighting instruments 111 lamps and bulbs 244 of the vehicle refer to Lamps 107 Light switch 107 Limit 85 Loading securing cargo 138
343. tween high beams and low beams refer to High beam assistant 109 Switching off engine 62 Switching on audio 168 CD changer 168 CD player 168 radio 168 Switching on hour signal 87 Swiveling headlamps refer to Adaptive Head Light 109 Symbols 4 indicator warning lamps 13 navigation system 162 status information 20 traffic information with navigation system 160 T Tachometer 78 Tailgate 36 Tailgate 33 automatic operation 36 emergency operation refer to Opening manually 35 locking and unlocking from inside 32 opening from inside 35 Tail lamps 246 replacing bulbs 246 Tank contents refer to Capacities 264 286 Target cursor for navigation 149 Technical alterations refer to For your own safety 5 Technical data 260 capacities 264 dimensions 261 Telematics refer to BMW Assist 209 Telephone installation location refer to Center armrest 122 refer to Mobile phone 194 Telephone list 55 Temperature adjusting in upper body region 114 adjusting with automatic climate control 114 changing units of measure 88 refer to Coolant temperature 78 Temperature display changing units of measure 88 outside temperature 78 outside temperature warning 78 Tempomat refer to Cruise control 69 Text language 88 Theater refer to Tone control 171 The individual vehicle 5 Third brake lam
344. two photocells in the inside rearview mirror one on the front and one on the back For trouble free operation keep the photocells clean and do not cover the area between the interior rearview mirror and the windshield Do not attach stickers of any kind to the windshield in front of the mirror either Steering wheel Adjusting A Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving There is a risk of acci dent as the result of unexpected movement 4 a a a p q E The steering wheel can be adjusted in four directions k i hem LL Storing steering wheel positions refer to Seat mirror and steering wheel memory on page 47 Easy entry exit To facilitate entry and exit the steering wheel temporarily moves into the uppermost position 94 Steering wheel heating Press the button When the steering wheel heater is operating the LED in the button lights up Programmable buttons on steering wheel You can program the buttons individually The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu Info sources va i Audio ZT Display settings Steering wheel buttons Vehicle Tires 7 Language Units AS Time Date Display olp lt gt 3 Select Settings and press the cont
345. u with extra support by supplying information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating conditions Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Things to remember when driving Things to remember when driving Break in period Moving parts need breaking in time to adjust to each other To ensure that your vehicle contin ues to provide optimized economy of operation throughout an extended service life we request that you devote careful attention to the follow ing section Engine and differential Always obey all official speed limits Up to 1 200 miles 2 000 km Drive at changing engine and driving speeds however do not exceed 4 500 rpm or 100 mph 160 km h Avoid full throttle operation and use of the transmission s kick down mode during these initial miles From 1 200 miles 2 000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture tires do not achieve their full trac tion potential until after an initial break in period Therefore drive reservedly during the first 200 miles 300 km Brake system Brakes require an initial break in period of approx 300 miles 500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors Drive in a reserved manner during this break in period Clutch The function of the clutch is only at its opti mized level after a distance driven of approx
346. ue lug bolts refer to After mounting 250 refer to Engine data 260 Touch tone dialing refer to Tone dialing method 204 Tow bar 256 Tow fitting 255 Towing 255 methods 256 tow fittings 255 With automatic and sport automatic transmission 256 with manual transmission 256 Town City in destination entry 145 Tow rope 257 Tow starting 255 TPM 96 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 96 resetting system 96 system limits 96 warning lamp 97 Tracks random sequence 184 sampling on CD 183 selecting with CD 182 Traction assist feature refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 91 Traction control refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 91 Traffic information for navigation 160 depiction in route map 162 displaying 161 during destination guidance 163 symbols 162 Traffic Info settings 161 Traffic jam displaying traffic information 160 refer to Bypassing route sections 160 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Transmission automatic transmission with Steptronic 63 manually unlocking and locking transmission lock 65 manual transmission 63 sport automatic transmission 66 starting assistant 93 towing 256 Transporting children safely 56 Transport securing device refer to Securing cargo 138 Tread depth refer to Minimum tire tread 229 Treble refer to Tone control 169 Treble
347. uilt up zones Manually switching between high beams and low beams If you wish or the situation requires you can intervene at any time gt Ifthe high beam assistant has switched on the high beams but you wish to use the low beams just switch on the low beams with the turn signal lever This deactivates the high beam assistant In order to reactivate the system briefly press the turn signal lever in the high beam direction gt Ifthe high beam assistant has switched on the low beams but you wish to use the high beams simply switch on the high beams as usual This deactivates the system and it is up to you to switch back to low beams In order to reactivate the system briefly press the turn signal lever in the high beam direction gt gt When the low beams are on use the head lamp flasher as usual System limits A The high beam assistant is designed to maximize the amount of time that high beams can be safely used and to quickly switch back to low beams when traffic approaches The system cannot completely replace driver intervention when unusual conditions are encountered For this reason switch to low beams when circumstances so dictate Failure to do so can pose a safety risk 4 Below are a few examples of situations in which the system may not react or may only function to a limited degree requiring personal interven tion gt in extremely unfavorable weather condi tions such as fog or heavy prec
348. uld be thoroughly washed with soap and water Keep oil grease etc out of reach of children and observe the warnings on the containers to pre vent health risks 4 Oil change Have oil changed only at your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel Approved engine oils The quality of the engine oil selected has critical significance for the operation and service life of an engine BMW continuously approves spe cific oils after confirming their suitability for use in its vehicles with extensive testing Do not use oil additives as these may result in engine damage 4 Only use approved BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is unavailable you can add small quantities of other synthetic oils between oil changes Only use oils of the specification API SM or higher Your BMW center will be happy to answer detailed questions on BMW High Perfor mance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic oils lt You can also call BMW of North America at 1 800 831 1117 or visit the website at www bmwusa com to obtain this information Viscosity grades Viscosity is a measure of an oil s flow rating and is specified in SAE grades The choice of the right SAE grade is based on the climatic conditions in the region in which you normally drive your BMW Approved oils belong to the SAE grades i 5W 40 and 5W 30 lt These oils ca
349. ument cluster 12 Display settings 87 102 Displays on the windshield refer to Head Up Display 101 Disposal battery of remote control with comfort access 40 coolant 235 vehicle battery 251 Distance refer to Computer 80 Distance control refer to Active cruise control 71 Distance to dest 80 Distance to destination refer to Computer 80 Distance warning refer to PDC Park Distance Control 89 Divided rear backrest refer to Through loading system 126 Door entry lighting 111 Door key refer to Keys remote control 28 Door lock 32 Door locking confirmation signals 31 Door locks 30 Doors manual operation 32 remote control 30 DOT Quality Grades 228 Draft free ventilation 117 Drinks holder refer to Cup holders 124 Driver s door only 30 Driving lamps refer to Parking lamps low beams 107 Driving route refer to Displaying route 157 Driving stability control systems 90 Driving through water 136 Driving tips refer to General driving notes 134 Dry air refer to Cooling function 116 Drying the air refer to Cooling function 116 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 91 indicator lamp 13 91 malfunction 93 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 91 activating 91 indicator lamp 13 92 DVD for navigation 142 Dynamic Drive 93 Dynamic Driving Control 66 Dynamic route in navigation 154 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 91 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 91 E
350. upward to the stop 2 Press the button arrow 1 and pull the head restraint all the way out Safety belts To ensure that the safety systems con tinue to provide optimized protection please observe the adjustment instructions on page 45 4 Before every drive make sure that safety belts are being worn at all of the occupied seats Air bags complement the safety belt as an addi tional safety device but they do not represent a substitute 50 Fastening Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle Safety belt reminder for driver s seat and passenger seat The indicator lamp lights up and a sig A nal sounds A message also appears on the Control Display Please check whether the safety belt is correctly positioned The safety belt reminder is operative at speeds above approx 5 mph 8 km h It can also be acti vated if objects are placed on the passenger seat Releasing 1 Grasp the belt firmly 2 Press the red button in the buckle 3 Guide the belt into its reel The shoulder strap s anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted refer to page 46 The two rear safety belt buckles integrated into the rear seat are for passengers sitting on the left and right The belt buckle embossed with Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG the word CENTER is intended exclusively for use by passengers ridin
351. ur BMW gt Original BMW Care Products are materi als tested laboratory tested and tested in actual use They offer optimum care and pro tection for your vehicle 4 FN Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol or solvents they can damage your vehi cle Cleaning agents can contain substances that are dangerous or pose health risks You should therefore heed the warnings and hazard indications on the packaging Open the doors or windows on your vehicle whenever cleaning the interior Make sure there is suffi cient ventilation in enclosed spaces Use only products that are formulated for vehicle clean ing lt Care exterior Washing your vehicle In the winter months it is especially EN important to ensure that the vehicle is washed on a regular basis Otherwise signifi cant soiling and road salt can cause damage to the vehicle 4 Failure to do so may lead to a reduction in braking efficiency and also to corrosion of the brake rotors lt Car washes Give preference to cloth car washes Before driving into the car wash make sure that it is suitable for your BMW Pay attention to the following points gt Dimensions of your vehicle refer to page 261 gt Ifnecessary fold in the outside rearview mirrors refer to page 53 gt Maximum permissible tire width Preparations for driving into the car wash gt Deactivate rain sensor to prevent unwanted wiper activation gt Deactivate rear
352. ure specifications in psi kPa Traveling speeds up to max of 100 mph 160 km h LEE EA lis LT 32 220 32 220 32 220 32 220 32 220 33 230 36 250 38 260 33 230 38 260 61 420 Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph 160 km h AFRI 32 220 32 220 32 220 32 220 32 220 E gt 33 230 35 240 38 260 33 230 33 230 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG poi tio 35 240 42 290 36 250 44 300 38 260 45 310 36 250 42 290 35 240 42 290 223 gt z O Wheels and tires 535i Tire size Compact wheel T 135 80 R17 102M All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi kilopascal with cold tires Cold ambient temperature 245 45 R17 95 W 225 55 R 16 95 H M S 245 45 R17 99 V M S XL 225 50 R 17 94 M S W 225 50 R 17 94 W 225 50 R 17 94 H M S 245 40 R 18 93 W 245 40 R 18 97 V M S XL Front 245 40 R 18 93 W Rear 275 35 R 18 95 W Front 245 35 R 19 93 Y XL Rear 275 30 R 19 96 Y XL More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 263 224 Pressure specifications in psi kPa Traveling speeds up to max of 100 mph 160 km h kikite ALT 32 220 32 220 32 220 32 220 32 220 33 230 Q 35 240 36 250 38 260 38 260 35 240 39 270 61 420 Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph 160 km h max hi PTIT
353. ure unambiguous identification gt The system only accepts name entries beginning with letters that are stored on the navigation DVD The system will not accept non existent names and addresses O gt Z 155 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG iDrive for operating principle refer to page Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Navigation is selected and press the controller Select a destination from the destination list and press the controller or enter a new des tination refer to page 1 New destination MARINA DEL REY ADMIRALTY WY Route preference gt Arrow dicolay t Select Start guidance and press the con troller i RK Naviqation r Add to address bock Information on destination Delete entry Delete list AT j I Ww lis H A L j After the route has been calculated destination guidance is indicated by arrows or a map dis play on the Control Display The destination guidance can also be started in the arrow or map view Select the s symbol and press the controller During destination guidance you can operate other equipment via iDrive at any time You will be punctually notified of a change of direction 156 by spoken instructions and the display of the direction arrow Press the m button on which the desired destination is stored Also refer to page 22 Select the se symbol and press the controlle
354. us 102000 M Rear brake pads bo BB Vehicle check IG Brake fluid i BE State inspection Gm Front brake pads The BMW maintenance system supports the preservation of the traffic and operating safety of your BMW The ultimate objective is to ensure economical maintenance by providing the ideal service for your vehicle Should the day come when you decide to sell your BMW a complete dealer service history will prove to be an asset of inestimable value CBS Condition Based Service Sensors and special algorithms take the differ ent driving conditions of your BMW into account Condition Based Service uses this to determine the current and future service requirements By letting you define a service and maintenance regimen that reflects your own individual requirements the system builds the basis for trouble free driving You can set the Control Display to show remaining distances and times of selected maintenance intervals and legally mandated deadlines refer to page 81 gt Engine oil Brake pads front and rear separately Brake fluid Vehicle check VV VV Legally mandated inspections depending on local regulations Service data in remote control Your vehicle stores the information required maintenance continuously in the remote con trol during driving After accessing the data stored in the remote control your BMW Service Advisor can suggest precisely the right array of service procedures for your own ind
355. ust be spoken word for word S You can have the possible commands spoken 5 by the system at any point te Helps O Using alternative commands There are often a number of commands to run a function e g nf Dial namet or gt Namet The system recognizes digits from zero to nine You can say each digit individually or group them into a sequence to accelerate the input 205 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Telephoning Example dialing phone numbers To start the dialog Press the gf button on the steering wheel You say Dial number e g 123 456 7890 The voice control answers Please say the number Depending on equipment 123 456 7890 Continue lt lt or 123 456 7890 And next lt Dial Setting volume of instructions You can adjust the volume for the instructions from the system en a pm vot Turn the knob during instructions This volume for the instructions is maintained even if the other audio sources are set to mini mum volume The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Calling Dialing phone numbers we 1 Dial numbert 2 Say the phone number For telephone calls abroad say Plus lt and then the country code 3 Diak The connection to the desired subscriber is established 206 Dialing number Correcting phone number After the last spoken sequence of dig
356. v i O iving Dr Radio readiness and ignition switched off All indicator and warning lamps in the instru ment cluster go out Starting engine Do not run the engine in closed rooms EN otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust gases can cause unconsciousness and death The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas Never leave an unattended vehicle with the engine running as such a vehicle represents a potential safety hazard Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning select the idling position or shift the trans mission into position P and firmly apply the handbrake otherwise the vehicle can begin to roll Avoid frequent starting in quick succes sion or repeated starting attempts in which the engine does not start Otherwise the fuel is not burned or inadequately burned and there is a danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter 4 Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it running while the vehicle remains stationary Instead begin to drive at a moderate engine speed Manual transmission Remote control in ignition lock or with comfort access in vehicle refer to page 38 1 Depress brake pedal 2 Depress the clutch pedal and shift into idling position 62 3 Press the Start Stop button Automatic and sport automatic transmission Remote control in ignition lock or with comfort access in vehicle
357. ve refer to Selecting settings Selecting settings For iDrive details refer to page 16 1 Activate BMW Night Vision 2 Press the controller to display the menu items Ni ht sion Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG 3 Select the menu item and press the control ler gt Night Vision off Deactivate BMW Night Vision gt Zoom At higher speeds the image is zoomed in gt Curve mode Depending on the steering angle and other parameters the image sections follows the course of the road to some degree gt Full screen The image is shown on the entire Con trol Display gt Contrast The contrast of the screen can be adjusted gt Brightness The brightness of the screen can be adjusted Tr Curve mode can only be activated with the Zoom function switched on With Full screen activated Curve mode and Zoom cannot be selected lt 4 The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use To exit the menu The image will automatically disappear after approx 5 seconds Cleaning camera The function of the camera may be affected by heavy rain and fog dirt snow or ice on the lens When this occurs the displayed image on the Control Display may become gray To minimize icing the camera lens is automati cally heated However it may be necessary to clean the camera lens manually under severe weather conditions When doing so cau
358. ver and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteris tics and climate Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under con trolled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 228 The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cor nering hydroplaning or peak traction charac teristics lt Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi cle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B andA represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law A The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive spee
359. wash with automatic and sport automatic transmission 1 Insert remote control into ignition lock 2 Depress brake pedal 3 Engage transmission position N 39 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Opening and closing 4 Switch off the engine The vehicle can roll Malfunction The comfort access function may malfunction due to local radio waves Then open or close the vehicle with the buttons on the remote control or with a key To start the engine following this insert the remote control in the ignition lock When unlocking or locking comfort closing do not simultaneously grasp the door handle and touch the surfaces arrow 2 or 3 Otherwise you may limit the function Replacing battery If the battery of the remote control is dead a message will appear in the Control Display 1 Remove integrated key from remote con trol refer to page 28 2 Remove cover 3 Lay in new battery with positive side facing upward 4 Press cover closed rs Return used battery to a recycling collec S tion point or to your BMW center lt Windows To prevent injuries exercise care when EN closing the windows and keep them in your field of vision until they are shut Always take along the remote control when you leave the vehicle otherwise children could for example operate the windows and injure them selves 4 40 Opening closing aS h y Th gt Press switch to resistance poin
360. window wiper and protect it from damage Take appropriate protec tive measures inquiring with the car wash operator as needed gt Remove additional add on parts e g spoil ers or phone antennas if they could be damaged Automatic transmission Before driving into the car wash make sure the vehicle is able to roll by making sure to 1 Insert the remote control into the ignition lock even with comfort access Shift into transmission position N Release the parking brake Switch off the engine a Rw D Leave the remote control in the ignition lock so that the vehicle can roll Steam cleaners high pressure cleaning jets When using steam cleaners or high pres sure cleaning jets make sure to maintain a sufficient distance and stay below a maximum temperature of 140 F 60 C Insufficient distance or excessive pressure or temperature can damage parts of the vehicle or can result in water penetration Follow the oper 239 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Care ating instructions for the high pressure clean ing jets lt When using high pressure cleaning jets do not remain in one place for a long time and be sure to maintain a distance of at least 12 in 30 cm from sensors e g Park Distance Control sensors or radar sensors 4 Hand washing When washing the vehicle by hand use plenty of water and car washing shampoo Clean the vehicle with gentle p
361. workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per sonnel Due to the high voltage present in the system there is a danger of fatal injuries when work is carried out improperly lt Access to lamps The illustration shows the left hand side of the engine compartment 1 2 1 Cover cap for parking and roadside parking lamps daytime running lamps 2 Sealing cap for turning lamps To remove the covers gt Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps daytime running lamps turn the cover cap to the left and remove gt Turning lamps turn the sealing cap to the left and remove Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps daytime running lamps H8 bulb 35 watts 1 Turn the bulb in the direction of the arrow in the opposite direction on the other side and remove Ka gt 2 Remove the connector and replace the bulb 245 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Replacing components Turning lamps H3 bulb 55 watts 1 Remove the sealing cap refer to Access to lamps 2 Push the locking bar to the side out of the anchor and fold upward 4 3 Remove the connector and take out the bulb Replace the bulb and reinstall Fold down the locking bar and engage it Reconnect the connector eS e Mount the sealing cap Watch the markings on the bulb when doing so Turn signals front 21 watt bulb PY21W 1
362. www safercar gov or write to Adminis trator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http Awww safercar gov For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety related defect to Transport Canada Defect Investigations and Recalls may call 1 800 333 0510 toll free from anywhere in Canada or 1 613 993 9851 from the Ottawa region and from other countries or contact Transport Canada by mail at Transport Can ada ASFAD Place de Ville Tower C 330 Sparks Street Ottawa ON K1A ON5 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www tc gc ca 7 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG At a glance This overview of buttons switches and displays is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle s operating environment The section will also assist you in becoming acquainted with the control concepts and options available for operating the various systems Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Cockpi Cockpit Around the steering wheel controls and displays mh WON Rear window safety switch 41 Sedan sun blind for rear window 121 Opening and closing windows 40 Adjusting exterior mirrors 53 Automatic curb monitor 53 Folding exterior mirrors in and out 53 1
363. xperience has indicated significant dif ferences in fuel quality volatility composition additives etc among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada Fuels contain ing up to and including 10 ethanol or other oxygenates with up to 2 8 oxygen by weight that is 15 MTBE or 3 methanol plus an equivalent amount of co solvent will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship The use of poor quality fuels may result in drivability starting and stalling problems especially under certain environmental condi tions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude Should you encounter drivability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline Failure to comply with these recommendations may also result in unscheduled maintenance 4 221 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG gt z O Wheels and tires Wheels and tires Tire inflation pressure Information for your safety The condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only to the tire s service life but also to driving com fort and most importantly driving safety Checking pressure Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold This means after
364. y Display 6 Ifnecessary move the controller to the right to select Display 7 Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use Units of measure You can change the units of measure for con sumption distances temperature and pres sure iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the menu Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Language Units and press the controller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Units is selected and press the controller j Languages Consumption Distance Pressure Temperature 6 Select the menu item to be set and press the controller 88 7 Select the desired unit of measure and press the controller The settings are stored for the remote key cur rently in use Language on Control Display iDrive for operating principle refer to page 16 1 Press the MENU button This opens the start menu 2 Press the controller to open the j menu 3 Select Settings and press the controller 4 Select Language Units and press the controller 5 Change to upper field if necessary Turn the controller until Languages is selected and press the controller Units Text language English US D Navigation voice instructions G7 Arrow
365. y not be able to restore the selected distance automatically This also applies to great differences in speed between your vehicle and vehicles ahead e g when quickly approaching a truck Once the system has established that a vehicle is indeed in front of you it will indicate that you must brake and or maneuver the vehicle yourself Take action yourself otherwise there is a risk of an accident Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Behavior in curves Xy a If the selected desired speed for a curve is too high the system reduces the speed within a curve However it cannot detect curves in advance Therefore select a suitable speed at the start of a curve Because of the limited range of the system it is possible that in curves or on the peaks and val leys of hilly roads a vehicle ahead may be rec ognized late or not at all Therefore it is up to the driver to select a speed that is prudent in view of the curves and terrain of the roadway In approaching a curve it is possible that active cruise control might react briefly to a vehicle in the adjacent lane In addition the system can sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not accelerate If your vehicle decelerates in either case you can choose to overcome the deceler ation by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal Driver interventions and your responsibility Anytime the driver presses down on the accelerator pedal a
366. y set you can update the list of stations with the best reception Select FM or AM and press the control ler AM WB SAT CD AUX i Presets an F 697 5 3 VV N C 494 4 7 KROQ B 100 5 Change into the second field from the top Select Autostore and press the controller Presets Manual 5 92 5 6 103 3 1 95 5 2 93 3 H 3 97 7 105 1 Press the controller Other menu items are displayed Select Autostore H and press the con troller ii FA 4 Autostore Autostore Store Tone The display of the stations offering digital reception is updated This can take up to 2 min utes With the digital stations additional information on the current track is displayed e g the name of the artist Select a station and press the controller Select Details and press the controller FMI 4 Autostore j T FM 4 Autostore Elton John Rocket Man Best of Elton John _ If a digital station is received again when the station is changed the additional information will be displayed again following a brief interrup tion 177 Online Edition for Part no 01 41 2 600 310 02 08 BMW AG Satellite radio Satellite radio You can receive over 100 different channels with high sound quality The channels are offered to you in predefined packages To receive the channels of your choice you must have this package enabled gt With this new t
367. ys the current fuel consumption This allows you to see whether your current driving style is conducive to fuel economy with mini mum exhaust emissions Fuel gauge Fuel tank capacity approx 18 5 US gal 70 liters including the reserve capacity of approx 2 1 US gal 8 liters 550i approx 2 6 US gal 10 liters reserve capacity You will find information on refueling on page 220 If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period when you are driving in mountainous areas for example the indicator may fluctuate slightly Reserve After the reserve quantity has been reached a message briefly appears on the Control Display the remaining range is shown in the computer Below a range of approx 30 miles 50 km the message remains on the Control Display Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles 50 km otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur 4 Computer Displays in instrument cluster a e mur e O Press the button on the turn signal lever The following information is displayed in the specified order gt Cruising range gt Average speed gt Average fuel consumption gt No information Cruising range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel The range is projected based on the driving style over the last 20 miles 30 km Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles
368. ystem is logged on to a mobile phone network This network must be capable of transmitting the ser vices gt To transmit position data the vehicle must be able to determine the current position gt In order to activate and update BMW Assist a GPS signal must be available gt You have subscribed to BMW Assist with your BMW center or with the BMW Assist Response Center Activation must be com pleted gt BMW Assist is activated refer to page 215 Offered services The following services are available via BMW Assist gt Emergency request refer to page 253 When you press the SOS button a connec tion is established to the BMW Assist Response Center The BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you gt Automatic collision notification Under certain conditions a connection is established to the BMW Assist Response Center immediately after a serious acci dent If possible the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you gt Enhanced roadside assistance You can call Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group should you require help in the event of a breakdown If possible the vehi cle data and position data are transmitted during this time gt BMW Customer Relations For information related to your vehicle call BMW Customer Relations gt BMW Assist My Info Using the BMW Assist Internet portal you can transmit addresses and text messag

BMW 535xi Owner's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents